Ὁ
—the art. added because this is a
continuation of the narrative from VI. 104.
Contrast c. 2.1, where the art. is
omitted because there is a transition to new points.
Γύλιππος
—son of Cleandridas, who had
settled at Thurii, on which see c. 33.6
note. His appointment to command in Sicily was the immediate result
of Alcibiades' advice. Nothing is known of his previous history. (
His character is in some points not Spartan. He is quick,
enterprising,
full
of resource, able to adapt himself to all men and to all
circumstances.
Freeman
. This
character reminds us of the description which Pericles gave of the
Athenians.)
ὁ
—the art. again because the persons are
thought of separately. Contrast c. 80.1
τῷ Ν καὶ Δ ἐδόκει.
Πυθὴν
—Corinthian captain.
Syr. envoys had gone to Corinth in the winter of 415, and Corinth
had at once
resolved to assist her colony.
τοῦ Τ
—T. has been all genders. In Attic
it is masc., on the analogy of all nouns in
‐ρας; in Alexandrine writers it became fem.; the Romans
made it neut.
Τάραντος
—Gyl. had been driven by foul
weather to seek shelter there. T.—regnata Laconi
rura
Phalanto—was founded circ. 705 B.C. after the first
Messenian war.
ἐπεσκεύασαν
—VI.
104
τὰς ναῦς ἐπεσκεύαζεν.
Diod. XIII. 1
τὰς
ναῦς ἐπεσκεύασαν
. . . τριήρεις κατεσκεύασαν . . . .
τοῦ στόλου παρεσκευασμένου. To the Latin sense of
apparatus
παρασκευὴ
corresponds; while κατασκευὴ has
the English sense of the same word.
Λοκροὺς
—founded about 690
B.C. on land belonging to the Sicels. Now Gerace.
ἤδη
—they had received several false
reports that Syr. was entirely shut in.
κατὰ τὰς Ἐ.
—via: cf. II. 76.4
κατὰ
χῶμα προσάγειν. Epipolae includes all the high ground
west of Achradina which was not inclosed in the fortifications of
the city.
στρατιᾷ
—dat. of
accompaniment, only used in naval and military expressions.
ἐβουλεύοντο
—because before
they had supposed that the only chance of getting into Syr. was by
eluding the A.
fleet.
ἐν δεξιᾷ λαβόντες
—except here Thuc. always
uses ἔχειν ἐν δ., ἐν ἀριστερᾷ.
διακινδυνεύσωσιν
—so II.
4
ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν
εἴτε τι ἄλλο
χρήσωνται. Thuc. does not use πότερον
. .
ἤ. He uses πότερον
twice, VIZ. I. 80
πῶς
χρὴ . . ἐπειχθῆναι
:
πότερον ταῖς ναυσίν
;
and VI. 38
τί
καὶ βούλεσθε; πότερον ἄρχειν
;
In both cases ἀλλὰ follows (ὑποφορά), as in Andoc.
I.
148
τίνα γὰρ άναβιβάσωμαι; τὸν
πατέρα; ἀλλὰ
τέθνηκεν.
ἀλλὰ τοὺς ἀδελφούς; ἀλλ’ οὐκ εἰσίν.
διακινδυνεύσωσιν
ἐσπλεῦσαι
—of the
compounds of κινδυνεύω, ἀνα‐, ἀπο‐, δια‐,
παρα‐ are found with infin.; ἐπι‐,
προ‐, συγ‐ are not.
Ἱμέραν
—founded 646 B.C. from
Zancle, to be a stronghold against Phoenician Panormus. It was
destroyed for ever by
the Carthaginians in 408.
αὐτούς
—τοὺς
Ἱμεραίους, the name of the people implied in the name of
their city, as constantly.
οὓς
—after the collective στρατιάν.
καὶ ἔδοξεν
—cf. VIII.
8
ἐβουλεύοντο, καὶ ἔδοξε πρῶτον
ἐς Χῖον πλεῖν
αὐτοῖς.
ὅμως
—in spite of his previous
indifference; VI. 104
ὑπερεῖδε
τὸ πλῆθος . . . καὶ οὐδεμίαν φυλακήν πω
ἐποιεῖτο.
ἃς . . . ἀπέστειλε
—aor. for
plup. in dependent clause, as constantly.
πυνθανόμενος . . .
εἶναι
—generally πυνθάνομαι and
αἰσθάνομαι take the partic.
φυλακὴν
—concrete, as in φυλακὰς καθίστασθαι
II.
24.
περαιοῦνται διὰ
—cf. I. 107
διὰ τοῦ
κόλπου περαιοῦσθαι. The accus. is the ordinary constr.
τοῦ πορθμοῦ
—IV. 24
ἔστι δὲ ὁ πορθμὸς ἡ μεταξὺ
Ῥηγίου θἀλασσα καὶ
Μεσσήνης.
σχόντες Ῥηγίῳ
—
σχεῖν is also constructed with ἐς
and κατά. (Bekker Anecd.
I. 173
σχών, δοτικῇ· Θουκυδίδης
ἑβδόμῳ.)
Μεσσήνῃ
—its older name was Zancle, from
Sicel Danklon, a reaping-hook, = ἀγκών
.
τούς τε Ἱμεραίους
—co-ordinate with καὶ τοὺς Σελινουντίους ἐκέλευον.
καὶ αὐτούς
—the
καὶ is epexegetic, introducing the
explanation of ξυμπολεμεῖν.
ἀνείλκυσαν
—so that the
oarsmen were available as infantry.
τοὺς Σ. πέμψαντες
ἐκέλευον
—observe (1) that
when a partie. and verb apply to a common object, the object follows
the constr. required by the partic., (2) that πέμπω is a regular exception to this
rule in such phrases as κήρυκα, πρέσβεις,
ἀποίκους, πἐμψαντες, as they are so frequently used
absolutely that the object is generally not accommodated to the
partic. at all: cf. II. 27
τὴν Αίγιναν πέμψαντες εποίκους έχειν: VIII. 40
Ἀστύοχον
πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον. Contrast c. 3
μέρος τι πέμψας πρὸς
το φρούριον αἱρεῖ: c. 85
ὲπι τους τριακοσιους πἐμψαντες ξυνέλαβον
.
πανστρατιᾷ
—Selinus only sent ψιλούς τινας καὶ ἱππέας (§ 5), as it
was at war with Segesta. (Thuc. is fond of thus contrasting great
projects with meagre performances. Cf II. 93
.)
χωρίον
—meanings (1) a
strategical position, (2) a farm.
Σικελῶν τινες
—the S were a
Latin tribe, and were driven from Latinm into Bruttium, whence they
were again
driven over to Sicily by the Opicans.
προσχωρεῖν
—the greater part
of the S. had supported the Athenians through enmity with Syracuse
since 451 B.C.,
when the Sicel lcader Ducetius had defeated the combined forces of
Acragas and
Syracuse.
Ἀρχωνίδου
—he had aided
Ducetins in founding Calacte on the N. coast of Sicily. When D. died
in 440,
Syracuse feared that A. would revive the power of the Sicels, and so
made war on
them.
ταύτῃ
—i.e. those of Northern
Sicily.
τινῶν
—A. was prince of
Herbita, and his territory, or at least his influence, probably
extended to Calacte
on the north coast.
ἐκ Λακ. . . . ἥκειν
—here
ἥκω expresses come duly to their
assistance, as in βοήθεια ἥξει
III. 4; c. 16.3
; ὠφελία ἥξει
VI.
93. Cf. VI 73
ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις
ἀπέστειλαν ὅπως ξυμμαχία
αὐτοῖς παραγένηται. The word
ἥκω is constantly so used in drama, esp. in addressing
persons who have come to bring help.
προθύμως
—cf. VI. 18
π. παραγίγνεσθαι, and c. 66 and 70 π.
ἀντιλαβέσθαι .
καὶ
—and so, giving the
result, as often.
σφετέρων
—ἑαυτοῦ
would be more correct here and in c. 3.4;
but the whole side is meant.
ἐς χιλίους
—direct object of ἀναλαβών. A prep. and its case may
stand for subj. or obj. of a verb.
τοὺς πάντας
—πᾶς
preceded by the art. gives the sum total. Cf. II.
7
ἐς τὸν πάντα ἀριθμόν. (The
Sicels were always a number of isolated atoms except only when
united under Ducetius and to some extent under Archonides.)
Λευκάδος
—Gylippus and Pythen
had left the Cor. here with filteen ships, and had sailed out with
four, hoping to
prevent Italy from joining Athens, but despairing of Sicily.
ὡς εἶχον τάχους
—cf. c. 57
ως ἑκαστοι τῆς ξυντυχίας ἔσχον . VI. 97
ὡς ἕκαστος
τάχους εἶχε . Tac. Ann. 15.53
ut quisque
audentiae habuisset accurrerunt
is a conscions imitation
of this. Xen. Hel. 4.5.15
ὡς τάχους ἕ.
εἶχε. Herod.
VI. 116
ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον.
ἀφικνεῖται
—having entered by
the Little Harbour (called Laccrus), eluding the A. fleet which
commanded the Great
Harbour.
μέλλοντας ἐκκλησιάσειν
—there is no
evidence to prove that ‘it was the very day,’ as Freeman says,
‘which had been fixed for the discussion.’ Thuc. only says that they intended to discuss the question of peace.
Λακ.
ἀποστειλάντων
—Krüger notes that the
gen. abs. is often thus placed qualifying a verb. Cf. V. 4
τρίτος αὐτὸς
Ἀθηναίων πεμπόντων
ἐξέπλευσε.
ᾐσθάνοντο
—by message from
him.
Ἰετὰς
—Steph. Byz. says Philistus
referred to it as φρούριον Σικελίας;
but it is quite unknown.
τότε
—Classen refers this to ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ, but as Thuc. never uses τότε with reference to the period
implied in a temporal expression, Poppo rightly refers it to οἱ Συρακόσιοι
ἐξῆλθον.
τεῖχος . . . τῶν Σικελῶν
—the perversion of the
natural order adds emphasis to τῶν
Σικελῶν. Cf. II. 5.5
ἐν
σπονδαῖς σφῶν πειραθέντες καταλαβεῖν τὴν
πόλιν, where σφῶν
belongs to τὴν πόλιν. Cf. on c. 17.3, 4, and 18, 1.
ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ
—So I.
126; cf. ἐν ὁδῷ
εἶναι, to be on the road.
ἑλών, καὶ ξυν
—when two partic. are joined by καί, the action of the one generally
precedes that of the other in time, or gives the cause of it. The
former may be the case here. (Hw. and Sta. bracket καί.)
Εὐρὐηλον
—it is strange
enough that the Syr. should not have established an outpost on the
point of the
‘Broad Nail’ in the winter of 415 when the fortifications were
extended; but still
stranger that G. should have found Euryelus now undefended by the
Athenians.
μετὰ τῶν Σ.
they had joined
him by marching through the open space north of the A. lines.
l 21.
ἔτυχε . . . ἐλθὼν
—with the aor. of τυγχάνω, φθάνω, λανθάνω the aor.
partic. expresses time not antecedent to, but coincident with the
time of the verb. To express time antecedent to the time of these
verbs, either (1) the pres. or imperf. of these verbs
must be used, or (2) if the aor. is used, the perf. partic is
necessary. Cf. on c. 4.3.
κατὰ τοῦτο τοῦ καιροῦ
—cf. c.
69
ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ τοῦ καιροῦ;
c. 33
ἐν τούτῳ
τύχης. Cf. also the idiom εἰς
τοῦτο (τοσοῦτο) ἐλθεῖν (ἀφικέσθαι,
ἥκειν) with gen.; id temporis; eo (furoris) venire
(Phrynichus says that the noun of time
requires the art., but no such rule
was
known to Attic authors, the art. being employed or omitted
according to the whim
of
the writer or as the meaning required. Rutherford.)
ἑπτὰ . . . ἢ ὀκτὼ
—it would be about seven to the
fort on the κρημνός, about eight
to the κύκλος, as far as the
building was then completed. (Those who think that the κύκλος was further north, and that the
wall between it and the
κρημνὸς was double —Classen, Holm, Lupus, Muller—are
foreed to bracket ἑπτὰ . . σταδίων,
as the length of the double wall must then be considerably greater.
See Intr. p. xii.)
μὲν
—answered by τῷ
δὲ ἄλλῳ. The double wall, as nearly completed, is
contrasted with the northern wall, very incomplete. (Fr. Muller and
Oeltze de particularum
μέν
et
δέ
usu Halle '87 place
μὲν between ἐς and τὸν helow.)
σταδίων
—gen. of measure; cf. II. 13
τὰ μακρἁ
τείχη τεσσαράκοντα
σταδίων. The position of the gen. is due to the
antithesis, which often causes a disturbance of the natural order.
See on c. 17.3 .
ἀπετετέλεστο
—on the question whether
Thuc. here neglects to take account of the wall between the κύκλος and the
κρημνος, see Intr. p. xiii.
ἐς τον . . . λιμένα
—it crossed three levels, (1) a
short portion of Epipolae, (2) τὸ
ὁμαλόν, the level just below the κρημνός, (3) τὸ
ἕλος, the marshy ground about Lysimeleia.
διπλοῦν
—contra
exteriorem etiam hostem, Jastus Lipsis. Cf. Lucian Ver.
hist.
I. 19. Endymion the king
of the moon made war on Phaethon k. of the sun, because the latter
had prevented Endymion from colonising Hesperus. The Nephelocentaurs
in Phaethon's service build a wall ὥστε
μηκέτι τὰς αὐγὰς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλἰου πρὸς τὴν σελήνην διήκειν. τὸ δὲ
τεῖχος ἦν διπλοῦν, ὥστε σαφὴς ἔκλειψις τῆς σελήνης ἐγεγόνει.
This produced peace.
τὸ πρὸς τὴν θ.
—epexegetic of τι. Cf. VIII. 21
ἐς διακοσίους τινὰς τοὺς πάντας.
τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ (ἄνὠ τοῦ
κ.
—the remainder of the wall
north of the
fort; the same as τὸ πρὸς βορέαν
τοῦ κύκλου τεῖχος in VI. 99.
Cf. Herod. I. 72 of the course of the
Halys ῥέων ἄνω πρὸς βορέην. (So in VI. 99
κάτωθεν τοῦ
κύκλου =south of the κ., as Sitzler explains. Without ἄνω there are two ways of taking the
text: (1) τῷ ἄλλῳ=ἑτέρωθι
on the other side of,
of which meaning there is no example; or (2) making πρὸς τὸν
Τρώγιλον govern τοῦ
κύκλου
for the rest of the wall on the Trogilus
side of the κ., but, from
the analogy of other prepositional phrases, it is clear that even so τοῦ κύκλου must be ‘partitive’; cf. IV. 108.1
τὰ
(τοῦ ποταμοῦ) πρὸς Ἠιόνα; IV. 5
τοῦ χωρίου τὸ πρὸς ἤπειρον. This would
necessitate taking κύκλος here to
mean the whole circumference of the walls, as in II. 13; but κ.
must
mean a central point between the two pieces of wall spoken of,
as it clearly does in all the other passages— VI.
98, 99, 101
, 102.)
ἔστιν ἃ . . . τὰ δὲ
—for τὰ
μὲν . . τὰ δὲ . .
καὶ ἡμίεργα . . . καὶ
ἐξειργασμένα
—the first καὶ marks the antithesis between τῷ πλἐονι and ἔστιν
ἄ, the second that between ἔστιν
ἃ and τὰ δέ.
παρὰ τοσοῦτον
—cf. VIII.
33
παρὰ τοσοῦτον ἐγένετ’ αὐτῷ
μὴ περιπεσεῖν τοῖς
Ἀθηναίοις, and παρὰ ἓν
πάλαισμα ἔδραμε
νικᾶν
Herod. 9.33.
μὲν
—in transition, as often, like μὲν δή, II. 4
οἱ μὲν δὴ οὕτως ἐπεπράγεσαν. οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι
; III. 24.
αἰφνιδίως
—Thuc. uses ἄφνω, αἰφνιδίως, ἐξαίφνης, and, in the
earlier books, ἐξαπίνης and ἐξαπιναίως. The last two are Ionic.
σφίσιν
—indirect reflexive, not referring
to the subj. of its own clause, but to that of the main clause.
Hence σφεῖς is regularly used only
in subord. sentences. But (1) Thuc. sometimes uses σφᾶς like Ionic writers, for σφᾶς αὐτοὺς or
ἐαυτούς, as II. 65
αὐτοὶ ἐν σφίσι . . .
ἐσφάλησαν. (2) He uses ἑαυτῶν,
like Attic writers, for σφῶν or
σφετέρας, as II. 7
οἱ
Λακ. πόλεις ξυμμαχίδας ποιούμενοι ὅσαι ἦσαν ἐκτὸς
τῆς ἑαυτῶν δυνάμεως, where
εαυτῶν refers to Λακεδαιμόνιοι
.
ἐπιόντων
—as Thuc. has given
no hint that Gyl. had as yet passed the Athenian lines, and as the
Syr. had gone out
to meet him, we may assume that he was still on the west side of the
lines.
ἐθορυβήθησαν μὲν .
. . παρετάξαντο
δέ
—sharp
antithesis, as III.
101
ὁμήρους μὲν ἔδοσαν, ἠκολούθουν
δὲ οὔ.
θέμενος τὰ ὅπλα
—lit. having
grounded arms,
taken up a position, cum
constitisset.
ἐγγὺς
—apparently in the plain, before
the διπλοῦν τεῖχος.
προσπέμπει
—in this use of πἐμπω the historic pres. is commoner
than the aor. If the negotiation is elaborate, the imperf. is used.
λέγοντα
—contrast II.
85
πέμπουσι
ξυμβούλους κελεύοντες. The nom.
and accus. are both used. Cf. III. 52
προσπέμπει αὐτοῖς κήρυκα λἐγοντα.
(Meineke and Hw. λἐγων or λέξοντα Kr. thinks λέγοντα may be spurious.)
εἰ βούλονται
—formal expression in
proposing terms; e.g. IV. 37
ἐκήρυξαν εἰ βούλοιντο τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι
.
ἡμερῶν
—any time within the period, like νυκτός,
ἡμέρας.
ἑτοῖμος
—as though λέγων had preceded. Cf. V. 41
οὐκ ἐώντων
μεμνῆσθαι περὶ αὐτῆς, ἀλλ’ εἰ βούλονται
σπένδεσθαι, ἑτοῖμοι εἶναι; VIII.
48.6.
ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ποιεῖσθαι
—sc.
αὐτά, the proceeding, as in IV. 5
ἑορτὴν ἔτυχον ἄγοντες καὶ ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ
ἐποιοῦντο. Cf. ἐν
with ἔχω, τίθεσθαι, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι,
as I.
35
ἐν ἀδικήματι θήσονται
; Aesch. PB 239
ἐν οἴκτῳ προθέμενος;
ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν, etc.
οὐδὲν ἀποκρινάμενοι
—Plutarch says the
soldiers asked whether the coming of a single Spartan had so
emboldened them. Cf. Isocr. Archid. 52
ἀναμνήσθητε
ὅτι εἰ πολιορκουμένῃ τινὶ τῶν πόλεων εἷς
μόνος Λακεδαιμονίων βοηθήσειεν. ὑπὸ πάντων ἂν ὡμολογεῖτο παρὰ
τοῦτον
γενέσθαι τὴν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς.
ἀλλήλοις
—added to show that the subj. is
no longer οἱ δέ.
ἐπανῆγε
—i.e. further westwards, away
from the Athenian lines, and in the review ground west of
Lysimeleia. Gyl. had apparently not yet entered Syr. (The edd. say
eastwards, and assume that Gyl had passed between the
Athenian lines and the walls of Syr As Freeman says, such εὐρυχωρία could have been found only to
the west of the A. wall. But he too thinks that Gyl. had been east
of the lines till now, and had to march out round the north of the
lines, not venturing to meet the A. in the narrow space between
their fort and the city walls. Diodorus says nothing; but Plutarch Nic. 19 has προσῆγεν
εὐθὺς ὁ
Γύλιππος ἐξ ὁδοῦ παρατεταγμένος.)
μᾶλλον
—with τὴν
εὐρυχωρίαν
the more open ground. Cf. III. 107
ἐν τῷ
εὐωνύμῳ μᾶλλον .
ἡσύχαζε
—the opposite of πολεμῶ, and so means to abstain from
acts of hostility. Cf. c. 12.1.
ἑαυτῶν
—plur., as in c. 1.5.
τείχει
—i.e. τὸ
διπλοῦν τ.
ᾡς . . ἔγνω
—ὅτε
is used when two acts are represented as simultaneous; ἐπειδὴ when the act of its verb
precedes that of the main verb; ὡς
when no connection between the time of the two acts is expressed.
ἀπήγαγε
—by marching round
the northern extremity of the Athenian lines.
Τεμενῖτιν
—it had been taken
into the city and fortified in the preceding winter.
ὅπως
—by far the commonest final particle
in Thuc., and rather commoner than ἵνα
in Xen. In all other authors ἵνα
very greatly predominates. (See table in M.T.
p. 398.)
ὰλλοσε
—esp. to Labdalum.
πέμψας
—back by the way by
which he had come.
τὸ φρούριον
—as Gyl. intended
to build his cross-wall along the north of Epipolae, it was
necessary first to get
possession of Labdalum.
τὸ Λάβδαλον
—in III.
97 the name means the neighbourhood so called, but here it is
the fort built there. Nicias had made no use of L., and did not even
keep up proper communications with it. After Gyl. had passed it, it
should have been abandoned
αἱρεῖ καὶ . . .
ἀπέκτεινεν
—cf. II. 67
ξυλλαμβάνει
. . . καὶ ἐκέλευσεν; 69
ἀποθνῄσκει . . . καὶ διέφθειρε.
οὐκ ἐπιφανὲς
—because the
ridge on which the fort stood was lower than the centre of Epipolae.
τριήρης . . . ἁλίσκεται
—an
event of importance, as this was the first Syracusan success at sea.
The Syr. were
beginning to think of regaining control of the Great Harbour which
they had lost
since the A. flcet sailed thither from Thapsus.
ἐφορμοῦσα
—sent out from the
A. fleet to the mouth of the Harbour.
ἐτείχιζον
—his
main object now is to hinder them from carrying their
north wall to the
edge
of the cliff, and down to the water on that side. A wall
running east and west
was
to be built.
Freeman
. This
is the third Syr. counterwork.
διὰ τῶν Ἐπιπολῶν . . .
ἐγκάρσιον
—four expressions are here
given in order to fix the direction: (1) διὰ
τῶν Ἐ. shows that the wall was to run along E.: (2) ἀπὸ τῆς π. ἀρξάμενοι shows that it was
to run from east to west: (3) ἄνω
north
of the κύκλος, as VI.
99
κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου
south
of it; cf. on c. 2.4; (4) πρὸς τὸ
ἐγκάρσιον
at an angle to the north wall
of the A. (The meaning of ἄνω is
much disputed: (a) Freeman says it means that
‘the wall was carried westwards, up the slope,’ with which the note
in Jowett agrees. So Stahl. In this case ἄνω
adds nothing new, but—as often—only gives the general direction
which is further defined by the words following it—viz. πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον; (b)
Classen renders ‘along the northern height’ and Fr. Muller ‘north of
the κύκλος,’ which is much the
same thing. This is better, because (1) it enables us to give the
same meaning throughout the description to
ἄνω, viz. ‘north’ (cf. c. 4.3)
of the place specified; (2) if ἄνω
does not mean
north, there is nothing to show on which side of the
κύκλος the new wall ran. This can indeed be inferred from what follows, but in the case
of the other counterworks Thuc. states clearly that the one was κάτωθεν τοῦ
κύκλου, the other διὰ τοῦ
ἔλους; (3) ἄνω thus
gives a new indication of direction and does not merely repeat the
other expressions.)
πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον
—adverbial,
cross-wise: with prepositional phrases used adverbially the
article is rarely found.
ὅπως . . . εἰ μὴ δύναιντο . . .
μηκέτι οἷοί
τε ὦσιν
—when
ἐὰν and subj. is changed into εἰ
and opt, the subj in a final clause is regularly changed into opt.;
the only exceptions in Thuc. are this passage and IV. 120
ὅπως, εἰ .
.
. περιτυγχάνοι, ἡ τριήρης ἀμύνῃ (V. l. ἀμύνοι ),
ἀποτειχίσαι
—to invest
the
city, by completing the northern wall.
l. 7
οἵ τε Ἀθηναῖοι ἀνεβεβήκεσαν . . .
καὶ ὁ Γ.
. . . ἐπῄει
—cf. II. 59
ἥ τε γῆ αὐτῶν ἐτέτμητο τὸ δεύτερον καὶ ἡ νόσος
ἐπέκειτο. The A. had lately (ἤδη)
gone up when Gyl. made his attack; τε . . .
καὶ are parataetic and deseribe nearly simultaneous
events.
τὸ ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ
—i.e. they had finished the
small piece referred to in c. 2.4.
Thuc. always writes ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ,
and so the orators unless some particular sea is referred to, as Demosth. VI. 12
τῆς
ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ ἀρχῆς.
ἦν γὰρ κ.τ λ.
—cf. c. 48
καί (ἦν γάρ τι
. .
.; I. 137
καί (ἦν γὰρ
ἀγνὼς. .
.
τείχους
—the northern wall.
ἔτυχον . . αὐλιζόμενοι
—imperf. partic. of
prolonged action; the A. were bivouacking by chance outside their
fortress, on the east side. ἐτύγχανον
αὐλισάμενοι would mean they had bivouacked by
chance. Cf. on c. 2.4.
ὡς ᾔσθοντο
—the regular periphrasis for αἰσθόμενοι when the partic. would be
inelegant.
σφετέρους
—after
ὁ. See on c. 1.5.
πάλιν
—is placed after the verb when not
emphatic. It is esp. common after ἀπάγειν
and ἀναχωρεῖν.
ὑψηλότερον
—pred.; cf. II. 75
ᾔρετο μἐγα
.
ἄλλους
—exclusive; cf. c. 61.1.
ἕκαστοι
—this word is frequently put into
the relative clause, like quisque, instead of
in the principal clause.
τὸ Πλημμύριον
—
the A. fleet was now . . . in the north-western corner of
the harbour, near
the swamp of Lysimeleia . . . Now that the Syr. were
beginning to stir by sea,
such a position gave them no command of the harbour in
general. . . . Everything
now had to come by sea, at a great disadvantage, as long as
the A. had no command
of the mouth of the harbour. . . . N. therefore determined
to occupy Plemmyrion.
Freeman
.
ἀντιπέρας
—the view from it
takes in the whole extent of Ortygia and Achradina.
ῥᾷον
—
ῥᾴων would be expected; but ἡ
ἐσκομιδὴ
ἔσται is treated as passive of τὴν
ἐσκομιδὴν
ποιήσομαι, so that ἔσται
would more naturally be
γενήσεται, as in II. 18
χαλεπῶς ἡ ἀνάστασις ἐγίγνετο. Cf. c. 28.1 (γίγνεται
and ἐστὶ are frequently qualified
by an adv. in such phrases as κακῶς γίγνεται
= it turns
out badly
for; so that ῥᾷον here
is not opposed to Gk. idiom.)
δῑ ἐλάσσονος
—local, as in δῑ ὀλίγου 36, 5; at a shorter distance
from the Syracusan fleet.
πρὸς τῷ λιμένι
—cf. VIII.
94
τοῦ πολέμου . . . πρὸς τῷ
λιμένι ὄντος, of a battle close to Peiraeus. The
phrase means near
the mouth of the
harbour. The fleet would now be drawn up just inside the
harbour, and there would be less danger of disasters like that
related in c. 3.5 when provisions were
to be brought in.
ἐκ μυχοῦ
—the north-western
corner, close to the point at which the double wall touched the
harbour
τὰς ἐπαναγωγὰς
—putting out against an
enemy; ἐπαγωγή, conveyance of
provisions, as c. 24.
ποιήσεσθαι
—see index, s. v. ποιεῖσθαι.
ἤν τι . . . κινῶνται
—the full sentence is εἰ τειχισθείη, ἐφαίνετο οὐκ . . .
ποιήσεσθαι,
ἤν τι ναυτικῷ κ.; hence there are two protases, both
of which, in the recta, are subj. with ἤν.
In these cases, the first protasis is the principal condition, the
second the subordinate. Cf. Andoc. I. 149
ἐὰν τοῖς ἐχθροῖς
πεισθῆτε, οὐδ’ ἂν ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ
ὑμῖν μεταμελήσῃ, οὐδὲν ἔτι πλέον ποιήσετε.
κινῶνται
—(1) sc. οἱ
Συρακόσιοι. Thuc. changes the subject more rapidly than we
should do. Cf. II. 3
ὅπως
μὴ προσφέρωνται (οἱ
Πλαταιῆς) καὶ σφίσιν ἐκ τοῦ
ἴσου
γίγνωνται (οἱ Θηβαῖοι),
(2) passive voice, as usual with verbs used reflexively, the purely
reflexive use of the mid. being quite rare. Cf. v.
8
ὡς εἶδε
κινουμένους τοὺς Ἀθηναίους.
προσεῖχέ τε
—in fact
he
was now disposed to give more attention to naval warfare.
ἐπειδὴ
—in
temporal sentences where the indic. was used in the Recta, it is always retained in the Obliqua.
ἧκεν
—cf. c. 1.4
.
στρατιὰν
—troops; the
greater part of the army was still encamped along the walls.
φρούρια
—
N. built three forts, a greater and two smaller. . . .
The new station,
standing apart from the constant fighting which went on
around the walls on
Epipolae, was thought to be a safer resting-place for
provisions and stuff
generally.
Freeman
.
σκεύη
—stores; cf. c. 24.2.
ἔκειτο
—Thuc. always uses the simple verb
instead of άπόκειμαι in this
sense.
τὰ μεγάλα
—i.e. transports.
ὥστε
—quamobrem. In Homer ὥστε is used only in a comparative and causal
sense. In tragedy, when used with the indic. (not found in Aesch.), ὥστε nearly always =
quamobrem, and this use is common in Thuc, as II. 87, and other prose authors.
πληρωμάτων
—one of the many nouns in ‐μα which is used in a concrete sense,
of persons. They are esp. common in tragedy, as δούλευμα, slave, πτῶμα, fallen body.
κάκωσις ἐγένετο
—pass. of κάκωσιν ποιεῖσθαι. Thuc. is esp. fond
of abstract nouns in ‐σις, as δήλωσις,
ὀλόφυρσις, ξύλωσις, and probably coined some himself.
χρώμενοι
—causal, joined to ὁπότε ἐξέλθοιεν. Such juxtaposition of
dissimilar expressions is far commoner in Thuc. than in other
authors. Tacitus imitates the mannerism.
ἐγγύθεν
—adv joined to adj. σπανίῳ, as VIII 48 ἄκριτοι
καὶ βιαιότερον ἀποθνῄσκειν, and often.
ἐπὶ φρυγ. . . .
ἐξέλθοιεν
—
ἐπὶ with accus. after verbs of motion corresponds to the
supine in -um.
τῶν ἱππέων
—having gone round
the west end of Epipolae.
Συρακοσίοις
—as the subject, μέρος ἱππέων, of the pluperf. pas is
personal, the dat. is ethic rather
than dat. of the agent. Contrast ταῦτα
πέπρακταί μοι (When the subject of the perf. pas. is personal, the agent is regularly expressed by ὑπό.)
ἵνα μὴ . . ἐξίοιεν
—epexegetic of διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ Π., as in I.
99
διὰ τὴν ἀπόκνησιν τῶν
στρατειῶν, ἵνα μὴ ἀπ’ οἴκου
ὦσι.
Ὀλυμπιείῳ
—this includes (a) the τέμενος
of the god, (b) the adjacent land. There are
still two gaunt pillars of the temple standing.
πολίχνῃ
—later this was
turned into a proper name.
ἐτετάχατο
—cf.
ἀφίκατο c. 75. The termination
is Ionic, but is occasionally found in other Attic prose writers;
e.g. Xen. Anab.
IV. 8.5
ἀντιτετάχαται. (Moeris wrongly says ἐτετάχατο Ἀττικῶσ’ τεταγμένοι ἦσαν Ἑλληνικῶς
.)
εἴρητο
—legular word of
military instructions.
ναυλοχεῖν αὐτάς
—to
lic
in wait for them.
προπαρεβάλοντο
—had
previously laid in a line for use, i.e. for the wall
from the circle to Trogilus
σφίσιν
—for σφίσιν
αὐτοῖς or ἑαυτοῖς. Cf.
on c. 3.1. Thuc. often uses
σφᾶς thus as a primary reflexive, referring to the
subj. of its own clause; but not when the reflexive is emphatic or
in antithesis.
τοῦ τειχίσματος
—the
cross-wall which he was building.
ἦρχε
—was first to )( ἤρχετο
began to.
τειχισμάτων
—the incomplete
Athenian wall and the Syracusan cross-wall.
χρῆσις ἦν
—another case of simple
abstract nouns (esp in ‐σις and ‐μα) with εἰμί,
γίγνομαι. Cf. c. 4.6; 16.2.
οὐκ ἔφη . . ἐκείνων ἀλλ’
ἑαυτοῦ
—the general principle in
Gk. antithesis is that the more emphatic clause comes second. (The
rule might be broken in the case of ἔφη,
to get the neg before it.) 16
ἁμάρτημα
—to add to the
disaster Gongylus had fallen, so Plutarch relates.
τῇ τάξει
—explained by ἐντὸς . . ποιήσας, and causal.
ἐντὸς
—i.e. μεταξὺ
τῶν τειχισμάτων.
ποιήσας
—sc. τὴν
τάξιν. The usual phrase is ἑντὸς
ποιεῖσθαι. The act. is used because he actually drew up
(constructed) the line of battle. Contrast ξύλλογον
ποιεῖν, of a στρατηγός,
with ξύλλογον
ποιεῖσθαι, of the men attending.
διανοεῖσθαι οὕτως
—to
convince themselves that they would find their resources ample,
and that they would
be guilty of intolerable lack of determination unless.
τῇ μὲν παρασκευῇ
)( τῇ
δὲ γνώμη?, the material con trasted with the moral
resources. A common antithesis. which we should not make so
prominent. γνώμῃ goes with ἀξιώσουσι. 23
εἰ μὴ ἀξιώσουσι
—unless they mean to bind themselves.
Πελοποννήσιοι . .
Δωριῆς, Ἰὠνων . .
νησιωτῶν
— chiasmus
Πελοποννήσιοι is addressed to the Syracusans by their
allies, thus reminding them of the origin of which they were very
proud. Cf. Theocritus
15.90-92
Συρακοσίαις ἐπιτάσσεις
ὡς εἰδῇς καὶ τοῦτο, Κορίνθιαι εἰμὲς ἄνωθεν
ὡς καὶ ὁ
Βελλεροφῶν· Πελοποννασιστὶ λαλεῦμες·
δωρίσδεν δ’ ἔξεστι δοκῶ
τοῖς Δωριέεσσι
. The Athenians, on the contrary, did not at
all care for the title ‘Ionians’
νησιωτῶν
—the Syracusans regarded
themselves as ἠπειρῶται. Cf. c. 21.
ξυγκλύδων
—cf. Livy
22.43
milites mixtos ex conluvione
omnium gentium. The word is rare in Attic, but is common
in late authors. (Cf. Photius συγκλύδων·
συμμίκτων, ἐπηλύδων.)
κρατήσαντες
ἐξελάσασθαι
—when
partic and verb govern a different case, a common object will nearly
always follow
the construction required by the partic.
ἐξελάσασθαι
—the mid., which is unusual,
is found also in IV. 35.
εἰ . . μὴ ἐθέλοιεν . .
εἶναι
—the Recta
would be ἐὰν μὴ ἐθέλωσι . . ἐστι,
but ἐὰν is future, not iterative.
‘Even if the enemy should hesitate.’
ἐκεῖνοι
—used of ‘the enemy,’
as often; sometimes even when a different pronoun is required by
strict grammar. 5
περιορᾶν
παροικοδομούμενον
—the
pres. partic. because the details of the building operation are
thought of.
ταὐτὸν ἤδη ἐποίει
—it
would probably come to the same thing whether they fought a
series of battles with
unbroken success, or did not fight at all.
τε . . καὶ are
alternative, as often, and the infins. form the subject to ταὐτὸν
ἐποίει.
νικᾶν
—why could not Nicias
have attacked the crosswall if he won a series of victories? Thuc.,
speaking in his
own person, seems to represent Nicias as quite blind to this
possibility.
διὰ
παντὸς
—continually
οὖν
—resuming after a long parenthesis.
See on c. 42.3.
ἔξω τῶν τειχῶν
—i.e. north-west of the κύκλος. With προάγειν
ἔξω cf. ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκστρατεύεσθαι
ἔξω.
μᾶλλον ἢ πρότερον
—and
not as previously. Before, they had fought μεταξὺ
τῶν τειχισμάτων. (This use of
μᾶλλον is a common meiosis, Cf. II. 41.2
οὐ
κόμπος μᾶλλον ἢ ἔργων ἀλήθεια.)
προαγαγὼν
—as to the exact
scene and formation of the battle edd. are unable to agree. The
question is of no
importance
ἐκ πλαγίου
—so as to take the A. left in
flank. Contrast κατὰ πρόσωπον
I. 106.
δῑ αὐτὸ
—Thuc. constantly uses αὐτὸ thus to denote something which he
has just described So too αὐτὸ δρᾶν
or ποιεῖν are idiomatic.
κατηράχθη
—this verb κατ‐αράσσω is often used by Dio
Cassius; and is found in other late authors, but with ρρ.
νυκτὶ
—words expressing
time do not need ἐν. Thuc.
extends this rule to words like ἐσβολὴ
and πόλεμος, which are quasi-temporal.
ἔφθασαν
παροικοδομήσαντες
—notice the rule
that wíth φθάνω, τυγχάνω and λανθάνω the aor. partic. does not
denote past time relatively to the leading verb.
καὶ παρελθόντες
—and
so
they passed. The whole of the passage from this to the
end of the c. is an explanation of the words
παροικοδομήσαντες.
μηκέτι μήτε
—more emphatic than μήτε . . ἔτι.
μήτε . . τε
—so neque . .
et.
αὐτῶν, ἐκείνους
—applying to the same
persons, as often in all Attic prose. So hic
and ille in Cic. de Fin.
4, 16, 43. 27
ἀπεστερηκέναι . . μὴ
—cf. II. 101
ἀπιστοῦντες
μὴ ἥξειν. The perf. denotes the completion of the act.
ἀπεστερηκέναι . .
μὴ ἂν . .
ἀποτειχίσαι
—virtually
oblique fór οὐκ ἂν ἀποτειχίσειαν.
αἵ τε
—answered by καὶ ὁ Γύλιππος below.
καὶ Ἀμπρακιωτῶν
—the art. (αἱ) is not repeated, as often in Thuc.;
cf. c. 14
τά τε
ὄντα καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα. 6
τὸ λοιπὸν
—with τοῦ
ὲγ. τείχους.
μέχρι τοῦ Εὐρυήλου
—it was
carried so far to prevent an enemy from approaching by the western
ascent to
Epipolae.
ἐς τὴν ἄλλην Σ. ἐπὶ ς.
ᾤχετο
—Cf. Herod.
VII. 193
ἐπὶ τὸ κῶας ἔπλεον ἐς Αἶαν
.
στρατιάν τε
—answered by καὶ τῶν πόλεων.
καὶ ναυτικὴν
—intending
to
collect one both naval and military.
μὴ πρόθυμος ἦν
=τὰς μὴ π.
οὔσας, any that were not (then) eager. Cf.
[Dem.] 11, 4 τῶν φίλων . . . τοὺς δὲ μηκέτι
προθύμους
εἶναι συναγωνίστας.
ἄλλοι
—exclusive use, πρέσβεις being contrasted with
Gylippus.
τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν
—for ᾧ
ἂν τρόπῳ; unusual order, found also in [Dem.] 47, 33 τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν δυνώμεθα
ἐπιμεταπεμπομένων
—sending for fresh troops. Cf.
ἑπιπέμπειν c. 15.
ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀνεπειρῶντο
—so c. 51; Dem. 51.5
ἐπεπλήρωτό μοι καὶ πάντες ἑωρᾶθ’ ὑμεῖς
ἀναπειρωμένην
τὴν ναῦν. Diod. 13, 8 τὰς
ἀναπείρας
ἐποιοῦντο. The technical expression for practising
manœuvres.
ἐπέρρωντο
—opposite of ἀρρωστεῖν. Both have a physical and a
moral sense. Cf. II. 8
ἔρρωντο ἐς τὸν πόλεμον .
ἔπεμπε . . ἀγγέλλων
—so
2.81
ἔπεμπον κελεύοντες. The
partic. is generally in the nom. with πέμπω
in Thuc. The imperf. here is probably intended to represent the
details of an elaborate act (as often with
πέμπω): thus it will suit both πολλάκις
μὲν and μάλιστα δὲ. See
c. 3.1 on
λέγοντα .
καθ’ ἕκαστα
—a prepositional phrase
replacing the object (of ἀγγέλλων),
as often with ἐπὶ πολύ.
δεινοῖς
—regular word for the
difficulties of war.
εἰ μὴ . . μεταπέμψουσιν
—the construction, εἰ with fut., expresses merely the logical dependence of the apodosis on the
protasis, whereas ἢν with subj.
shows that the speaker hopes or fears the fulfilment of the
condition. Thus Thuc. here puts the matter in a scientific form.
εἶναι
—not
ἔσεσθαι. Cf. Lys. 21.25
ἡγουμένους αἰσχρὸν εἶναι εἰ ἀναγκασθησόμεθα.
(The logical expression is sacrificed to effective rhetoric)
κατὰ τοῦ λέγειν ἀδυνασίαν
—the omission of τὴν after κατὰ
shows that Nicias did not know that they actually were incompetent.
ἀδυνασίαν
—this form, in place of the
commoner ἀδυναμία,
is found in Herod., and was perhaps used also by Antiphon.
γιγνόμενοι
—notice that in expressing the
two causes, Thuc. varies the construction (
κατὰ and causal participle).
πρὸς χάριν
—cf. II.
65.8
πρὸς ἡδονήν τι λέγειν,
and πρὸς ὀργήν τι ἀντειπεῖν. The
phrases are useful.
τὰ ὄντα
—the
facts.
ἐπιστολήν
—
litteras. In Lat. down to the empire
epistula means a private letter.
(Contrast the verbosa et
grandis epistula from Capreae.)
ἐν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ
—in the hands of, i e. through. Cf Aeschin.
2.104
ἐν ἡμῖν ἀποκινδυνεύειν.
Common both in prose and verse.
μαθόντας
=μαθεῖν
καὶ—so that μάλιστα
belongs to μαθόντας as well as to
βουλεύσασθαι.
βουλεύσασθαι
—come to
a
decision.
καὶ
—and so, a use
frequent also in Aeschylus.
φέροντες
—as in Soph.
Aj. 735
ἥκει φέρων Αἴαντος
ἡμῖν πρᾶξιν.
διὰ φυλακῆς . . ἔχων
—cf. διὰ
χειρὸς ἔχειν, δῑ ὀργῆς ἔ. etc.=ξυνεχῶς
φυλάσσων. τὰ κατὰ τὸ ς. is object of ἔχων. Superintended the army by
keeping it in a
state of defence instead of running self-imposed risks.
So Dio Cassius 47.36
αὐτοί τε διὰ
φυλακῆς μᾶλλον ἢ διὰ κινδύνων τὸ
στρατόπεδον ἐποιοῦντο, taken from this passage. Isaeus
7.14
ὃν ἤσκει καὶ δῑ ἐπιμελείας
εἶχεν.
δῑ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων
—Classen supplies ἔχων; Stahl takes the words with ἐπεμέλετο as an adverbial phrase.
Either way will do, since ἔχων is
itself almost equivalent to an adv. here, implying
continuance.
ἐπεμέλετο
—absolute.
Περδίκκου
—Perdiccas II., son of Alexander
the Philhellene. His shifty policy gave great trouble to Athens in the
war. (1) Before 432 he was in alliance with Athens. (2) In 432 he
encouraged the revolt of Potidaea. because Athens was in alliance with
his brother and enemy Philip (3) In 431 he was reconciled to Athens. (4)
In 429 Athens projected an expedition against him, but was unable to
undertake it. (5) In 424 he encouraged Brasidas to invade Thrace. (6) In
424 autumn, owing to differences with Brasidas, he made terms with the
Athenians, but lent no assistance. (7) In 418 winter, he again joined
Sparta, after the battle of Mantiuea. The Athenians blockaded him in
417. (8) He is now again on terms with Athens, but Thuc.
has omitted to explain this new change. The condition of Macedon was
much improved after the accession of Archelaus in 413
ἐπ’ Ἀμφίπολιν
—founded 437 by
Hagnon (strategus 440, 430, 429). It passed over to Sparta in 424, and
was never
regained by Athens, though it should have been given back under the
terms of the Peace
of Nicias. In 358 Philip added it to Macedon. It was the central city of
one of the
four confederacies into which Rome divided Macedon in 168, after the
fall of Perscus 4
τὴν μὲν πόλιν οὐχ εἷλεν
—the neg. put first in parataxis,
as often when the chief object of an
action fails; cf V. 6
Σταγείρῳ
προσβάλλει . . . καὶ οὐχ εἷλεν, Γαληψὸν δὲ
λαμβάνει.
ἥκοντες
—came in due
course. Note that ἥκω
has the meaning (1) to
appear duly—in court, of litigants, (2) to
return from an errand, (3) to reach one's
destination.
ὅσα τε ἀπὸ
—the oral
message.
ἀπὸ describes
the means. Cf. Aristoph.
Eq. 539
ἀπὸ κραμβοτάτου στόματος
μάττων ἐπινοίας; Vesp. 656 λογίσαι μὴ ψήφοις, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ
χειρός.
εἴρητο
Cf. c. 4.7
.
ἐπηρώτα
—why is the indic. used here?
Probably because Thuc. refers only to one
occasion, though many asked questions on that occasion.
ὁ γραμματεὺς
—sc. τοῦ
δήμου. Cf. Arist. Ath. Pol. c. 54
χειροτονεῖ δὲ
καὶ ὁ δῆμος
γραμματέα τὸν ἀναγνωσόμενον
αὐτῷ καὶ τῆ? βουλῇ, καὶ οὗτος οὐδενός ἐστι κύριος ἀλλὰ τοῦ
ἀναγνῶναι.
τοῖς Ἀθηναἰοις
—i.e. in the ecclesia.
Probably, if we may infer from the decision arrived at, a special
summons (κατάκλησις) had been
issued to the country population, among which Nicias found his chief
support.
δηλοῦσαν
—regular word with ἐπιστολή, ψήφισμα, νόμος, στήλη.
τοιάδε
—the letter is in the form of a
set speech. (It is entitled in F (Augustanus) πρὸς τοὺς ἐν Ἀθήναις Νικίου ἐπιστολή.
Cf. T. Its full description would run, according to the rules of
Hermogenes, which are followed throughout the rbetorical scholia of
Thuc., ἠ στἀσις
πραγματικἠ, λογική (or ἄγραφος
), συμβουλευτικοῦ εἴδους, κεφάλαιον ἔχουσα
τὸ
συμφέρον. Cf. the third letter of Isocrates, written
after Chaeronea to Philip.)
ἐν ἄλλαις
—here
ἐν contains the meaning on account of,
‘thanks to,’ which it often suggests, just as in Eng. ‘we could not
find our way in the dark.’ Cf. on c. 8.2.
μαθόντας
—cf. τί
μαθών, παθών.
ἐν ᾧ
—describes the
circumstances, as very often in Thuc. in quo
sumus statu. Cf. on c. 29.4.
βουλεύσασθαι
—to come
to a
decision—again ingressive.
κρατησάντων γὰρ
—the διήγησις (narratio).
(This excellently illustrates Aristot. Aristot. Rh. 3.16.11
ἐν δὲ δημηγορίᾳ ἥκιστα διήγησίς ἐστιν, ὅτι περὶ
τῶν
μελλόντων οὐθεὶς διηγεῖται ἀλλ’ ἐάν περ διήγησις ᾖ, τῶν
γενομένων
ἔσται, ἵν’ άναμνησθέντες ἐκείνων βέλτιον βουλεύσωνται περὶ τῶν
ὕστερον.)
μάχαις ταῖς πλείοσι
—why this order? to
emphasize the adjective. Cf. II. 2.2
ἄνδρας τοὺς ὑπεναντίους.
Συρακοσίους
—Classen notes on I. 108 that Thuc. constructs
κρατεῖν with accus. when it is connected with μάχῃ or
μαχόμενος (or when one of them is clearly imphed in
context); otherwise with gen. This rule is generally observed, for κρατεῖν with gen.=κρείσσων
γενέσθαι. Cf. Dem. 8.32
ὃν
κρατήσαντας τοῖς ὅπλοις; Dem.
19.319
Φωκέας ἐκράτησε (sc. μάχῃ ). [Demosth.]
13.17
ἐν τοῖς
ὅπλοις κρατεῖν τῶν ἐχθρῶν is bad.
ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπέμφθημεν
—this remark is mtended as
a defence, by reminding the Athenians of the original plan of
campaign. Hence ἐπέμφθημεν, not ἐστρατευσαμεν.
ἔκ τε . . . καὶ ἀπὸ
—one of the commonest interchanges
of prepositions, esp. in Isocrates. In some uses ἐκ and ἀπὸ
are different; e.g. of descent, ἐκ is used of direct
, ἀπὸ of
indirect descent. Even as used here, ἐκ
generally expresses the more important or immediate cause.
ἔστιν ὧν
—in the nom.
plur. always
εἰσὶν (οἳ, αἳ); in
oblique cases always
ἔστιν (ὧν, οἶς,
etc) in Thuc., except when words intervene, as in c. 25
ἧσαν τῶν
σταυρῶν οὕς.
νικᾶται . . .
ἀνεχωρήσαμεν
—for the hist. pres.
followed by aor., cf. on c. 3.4.
(Notice the extreme simplicity and beauty of the style here.)
τῇ δ’ ὑστεραίᾳ
—sc.
μάχῃ, as in III. 91. In I. 44.1
ἐν τῇ
ὑστεραίᾳ = in the next day's assembly;
and so in v.
46.1. But when no noun precedes,
ἡμέρα is meant.
ἀκοντισταῖς βιασθέντες
—in c. 43
βιασθέντες ὑπ’
αὐτῶν The dat. is not ‘agent,’ but that used in military and
naval phrases, of the general's
παρασκευή. Hence ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ
is to be supplied. Note also that with
βιάζομαι and all verbs denoting force
, ὑπὸ and gen. is common with non-personal agents, as βιασθεὶς
ὑπὸ
τῆς νόσου. See on c. 13.2
.
πλῆθος
—of
superior numbers, as often.
ἡσυχάζομεν
—regular word to denote
abstention from hostile operations. So quiescere.
μέρος τι
—the addition of τι indefinitely extends the force of μέρος.
ὥστε μὴ εἶναι
—the infin. with ὥστε here expresses something which has
actually occurred (it being the natural
result), as in II. 4
τὰς πύλας ἔκλῃσεν ὥστε μηδὲ
ταύτῃ ἔτι ἔξοδον
εἶναι. The more energetic indic.
construction with ὤστε is far
commoner in Xenophon and the Orators than in Herod., Thuc. and
Tragedy.
περιτειχίσαι αὐτούς
—he might have said περιτείχισιν αὐτῶν. Cf. IV. 131
οὐκ
ἐγίγνετο σφῶν
περιτείχισις.
ἐπελθὼν
—attack, here with
accus., παρατείχισμα being common
object to partic. and verb.
l. 22
Ξυμβέβηκε . . . δοκοῦντας
—with ξυμβαίνει and infin. either dat. or
accus. is used, dat. when the case precedes the infin, as II. 61
ξυνέβη ὑμῖν
πεισθῆναι
ἀκεραίοις
τε
—and so, giving the
result of preceding details.
αὐτοὺς μᾶλλον
—ourselves
instead
ὅσα γε
—
dumtaxat, as far as concerns, as in IV.
48
ὅσα γε κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον τόνδε
. Dem. 21.18
τούτων,
ὅσα γ’ ἐν τῷ δήμῳ
γέγονεν; Plato.Rep.V 14
ὅσα ἄνθρωποι. Thuc. very often omits
parts of εἰμί, γίγνομαι after ὅσος .
τοῦτο πάσχειν
—passive of τοῦτο ποιεῖν or
δρᾶν, the regular phrases for referring to an action just
described: I.
5.2; 6.5; II 11.8; 49.5
.
οὐδὲ γὰρ
—here begins the
description of the difficulties of Nicias.
τῆς χώρας
—put in a prominent position
because it further emphasizes ὅσα γε κατὰ
γῆν. Thuc. constantly inverts the natural order for
the sake of emphasis, esp. the order of the gen.
ἐπὶ πολὺ
—used here of
spacc, less often of time.
πεπόμφασι δὲ καὶ . . . καὶ
. . .
οἴχεται
—chiasmus is very
commion in Thuc., and is
quite a feature of his style.
τὰς μὲν . . . ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν
—the iegular, but not universal
order when a preposition occurs with ὁ μὲν
or ὁ δὲ is that the particle
should follow the preposition immediately; e.g. Andoc.
I. 29
περὶ μὲν τῶν μυστηρίων . . .
περὶ δὲ τῶν
ἀναθημάτων. In VI. 76.4
οἱ μὲν is in a remarkable position.
καὶ πείσων . . . καὶ
στρατιὰν
—the double καὶ marks the balancing of the clauses,
as in ὥσπερ καὶ . . .
οὕτω
καὶ.
τῶν τειχῶν . . πειρᾶν
—the act. and mid. are equally
used in this sense, II. 81
ὅπως πειρῷντο τοῦ τείχους. (Eustathius
on Hom. Δ 166 τὸ πειρᾶσθαι
παθητικὸν Ἀττικοὶ λέγουσιν ἀντί τοῦ ποιεῖσθαι ἀπόπειραν. Ὅμηρος
μέντοι τὸ πειρᾶσθαι πειρᾶν ένταῦθα φησὶν ἐνεργητικῶς . . . και
Θουκυδίδης
δὲ
τῶν τειχῶν ἡμῶν πειρᾶν.)
See also on c. 32.1.
δεινὸν . . . δόξῃ
—passive of δεινὸν ποιεῖσθαι
to consider
incredible.
δεινὸν ποιεῖν
denotes the outward expression of surprise, and is often used by
Herod. and Thuc. But often in the Orators δεινὸν
ποιεῖν means to act disgracefully; as Lys
3. 7, 26.
ὅτι καὶ
—for the ellipse after ὅτι, cf. Dem.
47.41
ἃ πεπονθὼς ἧν εἶπον καὶ ὅτι
εἰσπράττων τῇ πόλει
τὰ σκεύη.
κἀκεῖνοι
—ἐκεῖνος
of ‘the enemy,’ as c. 6.1. In. II. 11.6
ὅταν
ὁρῶσιν ἡμᾶς
δῃοῦντάς τε καὶ τἀκείνων
φθείροντας, we expect τὰ
ἑαυτῶν, but Thuc. makes Archidamus refer to the enemy
as ἐκεῖνοι
τὸ μὲν πρῶτον
—though
at
first.
ἤκμαζε . . . ξηρότητι
—cf. II.
20
ἀκμάζοντες νεότητι.
σωτηρίᾳ
—soundness.
νῦν δὲ
—the contrast of Past
with Piescnt is among the commonest of rhetorical deviccs. Aristotle
remarks that
the efficacy of Antithesis results from its having the appearance of
being a Proof;
Bain that it is a consequence of the law that ‘we are affected only
by change of
impression.’
ἀνελκύσαντας διαψῦξαι
—cf. Herod. VII. 59
τὰς
νέας ἀνέψυχον
ἀνελκύσαντες; Xen. Hell.
I. 5.10
ἀνελκύσας τὰς ναῦς ἡσυχίαν
ἦγεν ἐπισκευάζων καὶ
ἀναψύχων.
καὶ ἔτι πλείους
—the
corrective use of καί, as
Demosthenes in the third Philippic, ἀπόλωλε
καὶ νενόσηκεν ἡ
Ἑλλάς.
φανεραὶ δέ εἰσιν
—cf. δῆλός εἰμι. A periphrasis of ποιῶ , εἰμι,
or γίγνομαι with an adj. is very
common, esp. in Herodotus. See Stein on Herod.
V. 63.5 Cf. Isocr. Paneg.
122
πολλοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκδότους
ἐποίησαν.
μᾶλλον
—i
e.
ἢ ἡμῖν, ellipse with
the comparative being very common.
ἐξουσία
—the idiom ἐξουσία ἐστι or
γίγνεται with plain infin. occurs frequently.
ἐκ πολλῆς περιουσίας
—as
the result of a great superiority, i.e. ‘if we had a
great numerical superiority.’ For the use of
ἐκ cf. II. 62.5
ἡ ξύνεσις τὴν τόλμαν ἐκ
τοῦ ὑπέρφρονος ἐχυρωτέραν
παρέχεται. The phrase ἐκ
περιουσίας occurs also in VIII. 45
; Dem.
18.3; Dem. 45.67.
καὶ μὴ ἀναγκαζομένοις
—on the use of the
partic. here sec note on c. 18.1.
εἰ . . . ἀφαιρήσομεν
—see on c. 8.1.
τῆς τηρήσεως
—the use of these verbal
nouns in ‐της and ‐σις, so common in Thuc., is a means of
giving dignity to the expression.
ἔτι νῦν
—both ἔτι
νῦν and νῦν ἔτι are
found. φθείρεσθαι is the opposite
of αὐξάνεσθαι.
διὰ φρυγανισμὸν
—cf. lignatum,
pabulatum, aquatum ire.
ἀπολλυμένων . . .
αὐτομολοῦσι
—anaioluthon, the partic. being exchanged for
a finite verb, as in II. 47.3
λεγόμενον μὲν . . . οὐ μέντοι ἐμνημονεύετο.
(Anacoluthon is common in Thuc, but many falsely explain the solecisms that appear in the vulgate as anacolutha.)
ἐς ἀντίπαλα καθεστήκαμεν
—in II.
89
ἀντίπαλος is contrasted
with ὑποδεέστερος. As long as the
fleet was intact, the attendants had felt the superiority of the
Athenian force: but now the two sides were to
contend on equal terms.
ὑπὸ . . . μισθοῦ . . .
ἐπαρθέντες
—the verbs which in prose
commonly have ὑπὸ with things are
such as νικῶμαι,
βλάπτομαι, διαφθείρομαι, ἀναγκάζομαι, ἡττῶμαι, πείθομαι.
Lysias also uses ἐπαίρομαι with ὑπό. The thing so used must be such as
can easily be personified, e.g. (1) natural
phenomena, χειμών, ἄπλοια,
σεισμός, (2) external circumstances
, κίνδυνος, συμφορά, πληγαί, δεσμοί, κέρδος,
χρήματα,
νόμος, (3) emotions, ἡδονή,
φθόνος, (4) words that imply a
person, λόγοι, πράγματα, δύναμις,
when the person is often inserted (as ὑπὸ
τῆς τοῦ ῥήτορος δεινότητος), and all the topics of
rhetorie, as ὑπὸ τῶν εἰκότων, ὑπὸ
τοῦ δικαίου. The construction is
optional in these cases; e.g. Isocr. 5.40
says τὰς πόλεις ὡμαλισμένας ὑπὸ τῶν συμφορῶν,
but 6, 65 ὡμαλισμένοι ταῖς συμφοραῖς
.
παρὰ γνώμην
—(1) here
‘unexpectedly’; (2) may mean also ‘unreasonably.’
ἐπ’ αὐτομολίας
προφάσει
—taking the
opportunity afforded by
desertion is probably the meaning, as perhaps in Dem.
16.25
ἐπὶ τῇ προφάσει τῇ Πλαταιῶν
καὶ Θεσπιῶν τὰς
οὔσας
πόλεις ἀναιρεθείσας περυδεῖν. Elsewhere ἑπὶ
προφάσει means on pretext. Some, he
says, desert to the enemy; others simply go away. (Classen says ‘on
any opportunity of deserting’; but πρόφασις
certainly does not mean an opportunity of
doing something, but an opportunity which is afforded by
something.)
ὡς ἕκαστοι δύνανται
—as
they find a chance, i.e. without joining the enemy.
Hence he adds πολλὴ ἡ Σικελία. Cf. II. 17.3
ὡς
ἕκαστός που ἐδύνατο.
πολλὴ δ’ ἡ Σικελία
—the
remark has more point than appears at first sight; for there must
have been many in
the Ecclesia who still had a very vague notion of the size of
Sicily.
Ὑκκαρικὰ
—Hyccara (now
Carini) was a Sicanian town between Phoenician Panormus and Elymian
Segesta. The
Athenians captured it shortly after arriving in Sicily. Lais, who
became one of the
most famous and most exacting of the Beauties of antiquity, was
captured there and
sent to Corinth. A pathetic episode in the life of Aleibiades is his
love for
Timandra, mother of Lais.
ἀντεμβιβάσαι ὑπὲρ σφῶν
—cf. Herod. III. 14
ὑπὲρ
ἀνδρὸς ἑκάστου
δέκα ἀνταπόλλυσθαι.
τὴν ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ
ναυτικοῦ
—cf. Arrian.Anab.
I. 2, 7
τὴν ἀ. τῆς διώξεως
ἀφείλοντο.
ἐπισταμένοις δ’ ὐμῖν
γράφω
—you do not
need to be told that. Both in Greek and, still oftener, in
Lat. a 1st pers. sing. is used where we
prefer to avoid it. With the perf. in Gk., the impers. pass. is
preferred to the 1st pers. sing. act.
βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ
πληρώματος
—generally taken
to mean the
efficient part of a
ship's crew is small; and this accords well with the
next clause. But the Schol. says οὐ πολλῷ
χρόνῳ ἀκμάζει ἡ ναυτικὴ
δύναμις, with which agrees Plutarch,
Caes. 40
παρεσκευασμένος ἄριστα πᾶσι
πρὸς τὸν χρόνον ἠξίου
τρίβειν καὶ μαραίνειν τὴν τῶν πολεμίων ἀκμὴν βραχεῖαν οὖσαν.
The Schol. is probably right, though βραχὺς
in Thuc often = ‘small.’
καὶ ὀλίγοι τῶν
ναυτῶν
—it is but few of
the sailors that both
start the
ship, and (then) keep rowing (all the time).
ἐξορμᾶν means that the sailors start ‘working,’
ξυνέχειν that only few of them continue to work, ξυνεχῶς
τὴν εἰρεσίαν
ποιοῦνται. Too many of those who work at first ‘get
slack’ after a short time: others reserve themselves at the start.
τούτων
—Thuc. is very fond of putting the
‘partitive’ τούτων first in the
sentence.
πάντων ἀπορώτατον
—note the idiom. Dem. 8.35
πάντων
ἀνθρώπων
φαυλότατοι; Dem. 8.58
ἀνοητότατος
πάντων; Dem. 9.10
πάντων
εὐηθέστατοι; Dem. 3.16
πάντων
αἴσχιστα; Dem. 3.31
πάντων
ἀνδρειότατον.
τό τε μὴ . . . εἶναι . . . καὶ
ὅτι
—a clause with ὅτι is often combined with a clause in
different construction, e.g. Dem.
19.203
ἐπιδεῖξαι καὶ ὅτι ψεύσεται
καὶ τὴν δικαίαν
ἥτις
ἐστὶν ἀπολογία.
χαλεπαὶ . . . ἄρξαι
—cf. VI.
42
εὐκοσμότεροι καὶ ῥᾴους ἄρχειν
.
αἱ ὑμέτεραι φύσεις
—the common complaint that with
Athenian freedom was mingled
ἀταξία. The opponents of democracy ascribed the defect
to ignorance. It was, however, mainly caused by the too rapid
development of the Athenian polity after the Persian wars; the
people acquired democratic institutions before they had mastered the
lesson of obedience. Only exceptional men like Themistocles and
Pericles were able to remedy the defect.
ἐπιπληρωσόμεθα
—the fut. expressing
possibility after the rel. in primary sequence, the only
construction in Attie prose, except where the delib. subj. is
possible. Homer uses also the subj., generally with κέν.
ἀφ’ ὦν . . .
γίγνεσθαι
—both the men that we
have and the
men that we
lose come of necessity from the men that we brought out with us.
τά τε ὄντα
refers to ὀλίγοι τῶν ναυτῶν above: though but few of the sailors in the ship are really
efficient, yet we cannot turn the crews out and supply their places
with others —or, if we do, we must draw on the reserves we brought;
but they are badly needed to supply our losses.
τε . . . καὶ
—two distinct things are here
joined without repetition of the art., as in
Eur. Ion 7
τά
τ’ ὄντα καὶ μέλλοντα θεσπίζων ἀεί.
καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα
—refers to βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος above.
Sickness, exhaustion, and death remove many men in the crews: such
losses represent a dead loss on the total sent out, since there is
no source of supply except the reserves Notice (1) the chiastie
arrangement here—βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ . .
. ὀλίγοι . . . τὰ ὄντα . . . ἀπαναλισκόμενα—of which
Thuc. is very fond. (2) the neut., used
because totals are being dealt with.
αἱ γὰρ νῦν
—for αἱ
γὰρ πόλεις αἱ νῦν οὖσαι ξυμ.
Νάξος καὶ Κατάνη
—Naxos,
though the oldest Greek city in Sicily, was never important. It was
destroyed in 403
B.C Pausamas says that no traces of it remained in his day (a slight
exaggeration).
The site is now oceupied by an orange grove. Cataha was a colony
from Naxos. It is
an uninteresting town, the aneient remains having been buried by
earthquakes and
volcanic eruptions; but it is now the second city in Sicily in point
of size.
ἓν ἔτι . . . ὥστε
—i.e. ‘if they only succeed in
gaining over the Italian citres’; the
ὥστε clause being epexegetic of ἓν. Cf. Herod. V.
31
εἰ γὰρ τοῦτό γε δοκέει ὑμῖν
εἶναι
χρηστὸν ὥστε
τυραννεύεσθαι τὰς πόλις; Theocr. 14, 58 εἰ δ’
οὕτως ἄρα τοι δοκεῖ ὥστ’ ἀποδαμεῖν.
τῆς Ἰταλίας
—already before
the Peloponnesian war both the Athenians and Spartans had made
alliances in Italy,
by which they understood only the S.W. corner of Italy, from
Heraclea on the east
and the Laus on the west.
ὁρῶντα . . .
ἐπιβοηθούντων
—cf. II. 25
ὄντι
ἀσθενεῖ καὶ ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἐνόντων.
ἐν ᾧ
—see c. 11.1
.
διαπεπολεμήσεται
—they
will
bring the war to an end without striking a blow.
ἡδἰω μὲν ἂν
—Demosthenes, in the 3rd
Olynthiac, says that the old orators, Aristides, Pericles, Nicias,
used to speak the truth, not try to please. So Thuc. says of
Pericles. Cf. Livy 22.38
contio verior quam
gratior.
ἤν τι . . . μὴ
—should
the event fail to correspond with the pleasant
antieipation aroused in you by the evil habit some orators have of
speaking πρὸς χάριν,
πρὸς ἡδονήν. 24
ἀσφαλέστερον
—strikes the key-note of
Nicias' policy.
ὡς ἐφ’ ἃ ἤλθομεν
—and
so, as concerns the original object of the expedition, consider
that, etc. ὡς with gen.
abs. is often used thus with διανοοῦμαι
and such words See M.T. 918. Plat. Rep. 523C
ὡς
ἐγγύθεν ὁρμωμένους λέγοντός μου διανοοῦ.
οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε
—cf. Dem.
18.291
οὐχ ὡς ἂν εὔνους καὶ
δίκαιος πολίτης ἔσχε τὴν
γνώμην. A patriot's part is to deplore the misfortune
of his country, but not to attack the statesmen unless they are
really culpable.
ἀνταρκούντων . . . δέον
—the change is
necessary because the 2nd partie. is impersonal. Cf. 25, 9 ὄντων . . . διαπεπολεμησόμενον.
μεταπέμπειν . . .
ἐπιπέμπειν
—
paronomasia, as II. 60.1
κακοτυχῶν ἐν εὐτυχούσῃ , 98.3
ἀπεγίγνετο
μὲν οὐδέν,
προσεγίγνετο δέ. (It is one of the σχήματα λέξεως first taught by
Gorgias.)
ἀδύνατος
—recalling the technical term
for οἱ τὸ σῶμα πεπηρωμένοι at
Athens.
πολλὰ . . . ὑμᾶς εὖ
ἐποίησα
—rather unusual for πολλὰ
ὑμᾶς
ἀγαθὰ ἐποίησα. Dem. 19.41,
quoting Philip, ἡλίκα τὴν πόλιν εὖ ποιήσω
; Dem.
19.220
μείζον’ ἢ κατ’ Ἀμφίπολιν εὖ
ποιήσειν τὴν
πόλιν. It was one of the stock devices of orators to
dwell on their services to the state.
l 15.
μέλλετε
—sc.
πράσσειν.
μὴ ἐς ἀναβολὰς πράσσετε
—Herod.
VIII. 21
οὐκέτι ἐς ἀναβολὰς
ἐποιεῦντο τὴν ἀναχώρησιν; Isocr.
Ep. 1.10
δηλώσομεν δ’ οὐκ εἰς ἀναβολάς
Cf. οὐκ
ἐς μακράν.
τὰ μὲν ἐν
Σικελίᾳ
—help in S.
δῑ ὀλίγου
ποριουμένων
—will quiekly
obtain.
δῑ ὀλίγου is common
in Thuc., both temporal and local. Dem. 19.186
χρόνος ἐν ᾧ ποριοῦνται
ὧν ἂν δέωνται.
σχολαίτερον μέν
—sc. ποριουμένων.
τὰ μὲν λήσουσιν
—sc.
πορισάμενοι, and so with
φθήσονται. There is anacoluthon
here, the partie. ποριουμένων
being replaced by the finite λήσουσι,
φθήσονται. Cf. II. 47.3
λεγόμενον μὲν . . . οὐ μέντοι ἐμνημον εύετο
παρέλυσαν
—released. Cf. Herod.
VII. 38
τῶν
παίδων
ἕνα παράλυσον τῆς στρατηίης. Lucian has παραλύειν
τῆς δίκης.
αὐτοῦ ἐκεῖ
—pleonasm with αὐτοῦ is common: e.g. Homer Il
19.330
αὐτοῦ ενὶ Τροιῃ; Od.
20.159
αὐτοῦ κατὰ δώματ’
. Herod. I.
82
αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇσι Θυρέῃσι
. Plat..Alc. 1 109b
αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ
Εὐρώπῃ.
δύο
—thus the places of Alcibiades and
Lamachus were filled, but it was a great error to restore the
‘debating club’ method of command. Cf. Macaulay on Argyle's
expedition, E. H. I. 5.
μόνος ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τ.
—the chief emphasis is on μόνος. Take
ταλαιπωρεῖν to mean exceptional
distress as usual. It is often used of sickness and of the hardships
of a protracted or unfortunate expedition.
Ἀθηναίων . . . ἐκ
καταλόγου
—the fourth class (
θῆτες) was excluded from the muster-roll, and
regularly served as ἐπιβάται,
being exceptionally employed, ἔξω
τοῦ καταλόγου, in the infantry.
Δημοσθένη
—his record: (1)
426 B.C., Aetolian expedition, which, after a bad start, resulted in
the total
defeat of the Aetolians and Ambracrots at Argos Amphilochicum: (2)
425 B.C.,
established Pylus: (3) 424 B.C., successful expedition against
Megara, but
subsequent failure in Boeotia. He had figured as prosecutor in the
courts.
Εὐρυμέδοντα
—his record: (1)
427 B.C., commanded the fleet sent to Coreyra, but took no action:
(2) 426 B.C.,
commanded the land foree in a successful attack on Boeotia: (3) 425
B.C., commanded
the first fleet sent to Sicily by Athens, and, on the way, aided in
the
extermination of the Corcyrean aristocrats. For his want of suceess
in Sicily in 425
he was fined.
ἥξει
—see c. 1.4
.
ἐπιμέλεια ἔσται
—so Demosth. proem 54 ἡ ἡμετέρα γέγον’ ἐπιμέλεια. Periphrases
of abstract nouns with εἰμί, γίγνομαι
are very idiomatic.
ὑπομένων
—remaining
behind, esp. in a place of danger or duty. Hence often used by
litigants who might have avoided trial by
flight: also of troops in aetion.
στρατιὰν ἐπαγγέλλων
—cf. III. 16
κατὰ πόλεις
ἐπήγγελλον νεῶν
πλῆθος. Technieal word for sending out a formal notice, which may amount to a command.
Cf. περιαγγέλλω .
αὐτόθεν
—from Attica.
πέμπουσι
—see on c.
3.1. So pergo is constantly used in
hist. pres.
περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον
—this
system of cruising was started by Pericles, it being impossible for
Athens to spare
sufficient troops for an invasion of the Pel.
φυλάσσοιεν μηδένα . .
.
περαιοῦσθαι
—
M.T 724 ‘verbs of caution may be
followed by an infin. (with or without μή),
which sometimes has the art.’
τὰ ἐν τῇ Σ. βελτίω
—sc.
εἶναι. ἀγγέλλω
ordinarily follows the same rule as λέγω
, i e. it takes ὅτι,
etc., and moods when it implies no command; infin. when it implies
command: but Thuc. does not keep strictly to these rules ἀγγέλλω sometimes takes partic. on
analogy of verbs of showing. Demosthenes has Φίλιππος ἠγγέλθη ἀσθενῶν.
πέμψιν . . ποιήσασθαι
—for the periphrases of
noun and ποιοῦμαι
and its pass. γίγνομαι, see Index. προτέραν refers to the sending of
Gylippus and Pythen.
ἐν ὁλκάσι
—order perverted
for the sake of emphasis, as often. The sending of troops in
merchant ships was
unusual.
παρεσκευάζοντο .
. .
ἀποστελοῦντες
—the
omission of ὡς with παρασκευάζομαι is very rare except in Thue., who has it several times. Xen.
Hel. IV. 1.41
παρεσκευάζετο
πορευσόμενος.
τῷ αὐτῷ τ.
—i.e. ἐν
ὁλκάσι, with πέμψοντες .
ναῦς
—put first for the sake of the
antithesis with ἐν ὁλκάσι. So in II. 7
πρὸς ταῖς
αὐτοῦ ὑπαρχούσαις ἐξ
Ἰταλίας καὶ Σικελίας
τοῖς τἀκείνων ἐλομένοις ναῦς ἐπετάχθη διακοσίας ποιεῖσθαι,
where ἐξ Ἰταλίας καὶ Σ. ought to
follow
τοῖς, but is put first to eontrast it with αὐτοῦ .
ὅπως . . . ἀποπειράσωσι . . .
κωλύοιεν
—as the two forms
are equally
correct, we
sometimes find both in the same sentence.—Goodivm.
τὴν ἐν τῇ Ν. φυλακήν
—the
station was first established under Phormio in the autumn of 430 in
order to close
the mouth of the Corinthian Gulf. Trans. ‘against the ships
stationed at N.’
αὐτῶν
—should be
σφῶν.
πρὸς τὴν σφετέραν
ἀντίταξιν
—by having
to watch their line of
war-ships
which would be opposing them; i.e. the attention which
the A. would have to bestow on the Cor. triremes would give the
merchant ships a chance.
παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ
—this
epanaphora of παρασκευά‐
ζομαι completes the account of the
preparations on the part of (1) Demosthenes, (2) the Corinthians and
Lac., (3) the Lac. Cf. 2.7
οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι παρεσκευάζοντο,
παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ καὶ οἱ
Αακεδαιμόνιοι.
τὴν . . . ἐσβολὴν
—there had
been no invasion of Attica since 425.
ὥσπερ τε προεδέδοκτο . . .
ἐναγόντων
—the circumstantial
partic. is joined with any expression of similar import in another
construction; in accordance with
their own
previous determination and at the instigation of. Thus
the peaec of Nicias was finally breaking down after some eight years
of half peace.
ἐπειδὴ ἐπυνθάνοντο
—sc. the
Cor. and Syr.
τὴν . . . βοήθειαν ἐς τὴν
Σικελίαν
—Cf. II.
52
ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν; Herod. III.
7
οἱ τὴν ἐσβολὴν ταύτην
παρασκευάσαντες ἐς
Αἱγύπτον; V. 63
ὁ
πρῶτος στόλος ἐκ Αακεδαίμονος. This omission of art.
before the prep. is common with verbal substantives. If the prep.
and case precedes the art., as in καθ’ ἡμέραν ἡ
τέρψις (cf. on c. 17.4) II. 38.1, the object is to produce
antithesis
δὴ
—giving the actual
reason, as in V. 85
al.
προσκείμενος
ἐδίδασκε
—urgently
advised them.
Δεκέλειαν
—it commands the
road from Athens to Oropus, and thus to Euboea, whence came a great
part of the corn
supplies of Athens. Of similar strategical importance were Phyle and
Oenoe.
προτέρῳ
—the Archidamian war.
Πλάταιαν
—it was an ally of Athens since
520 B.C. III. 68.5.
πρότερον
—the thirty years'
truce, 445 B.C.
ἐθέλωσι
—the form
θέλω is archaic, and in Attic prose occurs only in the
phrase ἢν θεὸς θέλη?.
διδόναι δίκας
—submit
to a
judicial decision; contrast δίκην
δοῦναι .
εἰκότως
—deservedly. Cf. εἰκός ἐστι=decet.
ἐνεθυμοῦντο
—began to
think over—i.e. began to think it had been deserved.
τὴν περὶ Πύλον ξυμφορὰν
—in
425 B.C.
Ἐπιδαύρου
= E. Limera, in
Laconia. There are ruins of the town. The A. had ravaged it in 414,
and thus broken
the terms of the peace.
Πρασιῶν
—also in Laconia, and
ravaged at the same time as Epidaurus. It had been destroyed by the
A. in 430. It
suffered severely, and its fate is a proof how effective the method
of Pericles was.
τῶν κατὰ τὰς σπονδὰς
ἀ.
—about disputed
points in the treaty of
421, after περί του
ἐπιτρέπειν
—Pollux says ἡ δίαιτα (arbitration) ἐκαλεῖτο
ἐπιτροπή.
τότε δὴ
—co-ordinate with ἐπειδὴ above, introducing the decisive
moment.
σφίσι
—the subject of the
perf. or pluperf. pass. not being personal, the agent is necessarily
in dative.
ἡμάρτητο
—cf. Plat.
Rep. 544D
ἡμαρτημένας
πόλεις.
τὸ αὐτὸ
—rendering τὸ παρανόμημα still clearer. The
sentence of which this section consists is in every way a model of
style, and will repay careful attention.
περιεστάναι
—shifted
round like a wheel, as Cicero says of politics orbis
reipublicae cst convcrsus (ad At.
II.
9)
σίδηρον
—iron
tools.
περιήγγελλον
—as in II.
85
ναῦς περιήγγελλον κατὰ πόλεις.
We expect παρασκευάζεσθαι or πέμψαι to follow.
ἐπιτειχισμόν
—of Deeelea.
ἐπικουρίαν
—esp. used of a
foreign (or mercenary) force.
προσηνάγκαζον
—se. πορίζειν, the same brachylogy as with διανοοῦμαι
V. 80
, οἶμαι c.
66.3, ὁρῶ
V. 80.
ὄγδοον καὶ δέκατον
—contrast VIII. 6
ἑνὸς δέον
εἰκοστόν. The periphrastie forms are preferred in prose,
esp. for 19, 29, etc.
ἐτελεύτα τῷδε
—the
epanaphora of the verb in this formula is prob. accidental. The
formal close is in aeeordance with the Gk. habit of ending quietly.
ἐπιγιγνομένου
—used of
natural phenomena, whether ordinary or unexpected.
ἡγεῖτο
—ἡγεμὼν
is the regular word for a Spartan king or regent in the field, and
for the supreme commander of any foreign expedition.
Ἀρχιδάμου
—had died in 427
B.C
πρῶτον μὲν . . . ἔπειτα
—Thue. has πρῶτον (πρῶτα
) μὲν . . ἔπειτα twenty-eight
times, while he adds δὲ only eight
times. If καὶ follows ἔπειτα, δὲ is regulaily added, even if πρῶτον is without μέν.
τὰ περὶ τὸ πεδίον
—the
country about the (Attic) plain
κατὰ πόλεις διελόμενοι
—a
common practice.
εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν
—if the text is right,
Thuc. reckons in the case of Boeotia from Oropus, which belonged to
Athens and from which ran the road to Decelea and Athens, through
the demes of Aphidna and Cephisia. Otherwise the distance would be
much less. But from ἀπέχει to Βοιωτίας may be spurious, like some
others of the geographieal data in Thuc.
[καὶ οὐ π. πλέον]
—or
not
much more; but καὶ
added in B is prob. only a correction. When an adscript is brought
into the text, it is frequently joined on with καί.
ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ
—for the
control of, iu speaking of forts, etc., which by their
position threaten a locality; e.g
V. 7
ἐθεᾶτο τὴν
θέσιν τῆς πόλεως ἐτὶ Θράκῃ ὡς
ἔχοι. Cf the Château Gaillard.
τοῖς κρατίστοις
—the
richest parts, the soil of Attica as a whole not being
rich. The land about Cephisia is noted for its vegetation.
ἐς τὸ κακουργεῖν
—with ᾠκοδομεῖτο, expressing purpose. Cf. Dem.
31.13
παρεσκεύασεν εἰς τὸ λέγειν
τι δοκεῖν.
ταῖς ὁλκάσι
—without ἐν, as c. 7.3
.
ἐπιλεξάμενοι
—i.e. placing them among the
hoplites. They were first so used by Brasidas in Thrace. Before this
they had only attended their masters in the field. One as
θεράπων was his master's armour-bearer. The rest were
used either as light-armed troops, or as sappers, engmeers, or
carriers. The king often ordered them to carry booty.
νεοδαμώδων
—helots
emancipated as a reward for military services since 424 B.C.
ἄρχοντα
—not
ἡγεμών, as it was not a general expedition
under the king. Contrast § 1. So Brasidas is always called
ἄρχων or στρατηγός.
Βοιωτοὶ
—loosely reekoned among οἱ ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ, as though he had
said only οἱ δὲ Πελοποννήσιοι,
which generally in Thuc. includes all the allies of Sparta. When in II. 9 he says Πελοποννήσιοι
πάντες πλὴν Ἀργείων καὶ
Ἀχαιῶν. he uses Π.
in the strict geographieal sense, in contrast with the Greeks ἔξω
Πελοποννήσου.
ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι
—the same idiom c. 24.3; 27.3
; 71.3. It is constantly corrupted in
the MSS. of Thuc., as the scribes did not understand it.
ὁρμήσαντες
—generally ὁρμῶμαι is used in this sense.
ἐς τὸ πέλαγος ἀφεῖσαν
—a frequent idiom; e.g. Herod. VII. 193; Aristoph Eq 432 ἀφήσω κατὰ
κύμ’ ἐμαυτὸν
οὔριον. θάλασσα cannot be used in this phrase; only
Plutarch and Pausanias do so.
μετὰ δὲ τούτους
Κορίνθιοι
—this still refers
to οἱ δ’ ἐν
τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ above, which is in fact divided into Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν . . . Βοιωτοὶ δὲ . . .
Κορίνθιοι . . .
Σικυώνιοι, but the sense requires that the imperf. ἀπέστελλον should be given up for the
aor. ἀφεῖσαν, ἀπέπεμψαν, ἀπέστειλαν.
(The form of this passage, like many others, shows how Thuc. is in a
transition stage between the εἰρομένη λέξις—running
style of Herod.—and the artificial periods of Isocrates.)
ἄρχοντα
—governed by both
partic, and verb.
Σικυώνιοι
—now dissatisfied
with Sparta because early in 417 an aristocratic government had been
foreed upon it.
This aristocracy, however, subsequently got the upper hand, and
Sicyon aided Sparta
after the battle of Leuctra, 371. But in 369, the democrats revived
and Sicyon
joined Thebes. In 367 or 6, after violent dissensions and the
tyranny of Euthyphron,
it passed again into the hands of Sparta.
l. 39
ἕωσπερ
—rare, except in Plato. It occurs
in Xen. Hel. VI. 5.12, VII. 2.23 (Dindorf); Xen.
Cyr. VII. 5.39; Dem. 54.3; Plat. Lach. 188B; Apol.
29D; Prot. 325A; Rep. 342B, 433 B; Phaedr.
243E; Theaet. 177D,
200 C; Meno
97C; Parm. 144C; Sophist. 235C.
αὐτοῖς
—they found
that—dat. of interest.
τὸν νοῦν ἔχωσιν
—distinguish from νοῦν ἔχειν = to be sensible.
περί τε
—answered by καὶ τὸν Δημοσθένη.
ᾧ εἴρητο . . . ἀφικομένῳ . . .
παρακαλεῖν
—same construction c. 20.1. The other constr.—the partic. in
the aecus.—is found also in c. 20. Cf. VIII. 39
εἴρητο
αὐτοῖς ἐς Μίλητον ἀφικομένους
ξυνεπιμελεῖσθαι.
τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν
—Argos was
neutral throughout the Archidamian War, having a treaty with Sparta.
It finally
joined Athens in 417.
παρακαλεῖν . . . ἐπὶ
—a military phrase; cf. παραβοηθεῖν ἐπὶ c. 37.3; 53.1:
71, 6.
ἀπέστελλον
—imperf. representing the
details of an elaborate business, as constantly with ‘sending’
verbs; cf. on c. 3.1.
Χίαις
—the only island in the
Aegean besides Lesbos then retaining the position of an independent
ally of Athens.
Hence it supplied a contingent of ships and paid no tribute.
Ἀθηναίων
—after δ
καὶ χ., partitive. See on c.
16.1.
νησιωτῶν
—i.e. the other Aegean islands;
it was their duty to supply πεζὸν καὶ
χρήματα.
χρήσασθαι
—ingressive,
‘obtain for service’—a sense almost confined to first aor. forms.
ἄλλων
—viz. those of Ionia, Hellespont,
and Thraciau Chalcidice. They also were liable
to supply infantry, if required. (This incident illustrates the
encroachments of Athens on the rights of her allies. They were not
originally liable to personal service after they commuted their
contmgents for a money payment; much less were they bound to supply
anything Athens might require.)
εἶχον
—subject, the
Athenians.
ξυμπορίσαντες
—joined by καὶ to the datives above, as all
express attendant circumstances of some kind.
Χαρικλέους
—he had been one of the
commission, ζητηταί, appointed to
inquire into the mysterious mutilation of the Hermae in 415. (Like
Pisander, he started as a democrat, but went over to the oligarelis
in 412, beeoming one of the Four Hundred. He fied to Decelea when
the Fom Hundred were deposed, and assisted in the ruin of Athens. He
returned along with Critias and other exiles under the terms of
peaee imposed by Sparta. He was active in promoting the
establishment of the Thirty, of whom he became one. When Theramenes
opposed the violent measures of Critias, and the party split into
two factions, Charicles followed Critias and shared with him the
authorship of the worst deeds of the Thirty. His demeanour was
servile to Lysander, but overbearing towards his countrymen.)
καὶ τὸν κ τ.λ.
—the clause is object of περιέμενε. Cf. III.
2.2.
ἧκεν
—returned from his
expedition into the interior.
ἑκασταχόθεν
—in the rel. clause, as c. 20.2.
l 7.
ἀπόπειραν λαμβάνειν
—cf. Herod. VIII. 9
ἀπόπειραν
ποιήσασθαι .
ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ
—i.e. ἀπὸ
τοῦ ναυμαχίας ἀπόπειραν λ.: there is the same use of id, hoc, quod, quae, in Lat, as Cic. de
Leg.
II. 33
exemplorum
nostra
est plena respublica ex augurum praedictis mulla
vera cecidisse. Neque enim . . id (i.e. augurandi
consuetudinem) ad hoc tempus retinuissent.
ἄξιον τοῦ
κινδύνου
—worth the risk,
something which would be cheap at the price, a
good return.
ξυνανέπειθε δὲ
—very difficult: ‘Moreover
H. earnestly supported his advice (καὶ
only emphasises
ξυν‐),
so that they might not lack spirit to attack by sea, saying as a
retort to the A. that even they had no hereditary right to naval
skill, nor yet would it last for ever.’ The imperf and the ‐αν‐ both denote the
difficulty of persuading them. They had before thought of
peace.
Ἑρμοκράτης
—the Themistocles
of Syracuse.
τοῦ . . . μὴ ἀθυμεῖν
—expresses purpose, a
construction rare outside Thuc. (So Goodwin; but edd. rightly deny
that the words can go directly with
ξυνανέπειθε. The remedy is surely to comma them off, not
to alter τοῦ .)
ταῖς ναυσὶ
—
not ‘attack the A. fleet,’ but ‘attack with their own
fleet’; cf. c. 7.4.
ἐπιχειρῆσαι
—the MSS. have the fut., but
the abbreviations for the aor. and fut. were indistinguishable. (If
it is bracketed, ταῖς ναυσι must
go with άθυμεῖν.)
πρὸς τοὺς Ἀ.
—it is always assumed that this
goes with ἐπιχειρῆσαι, but there
are no instances of ἐπιχειρεῖν προς
(L. and S. cite this wrongly as 7, 51): hence we take it with λέγων, as in σκοπεῖν,
βουλεύεσθαι πρός. Cf. Andoc. 1, 48 λέγει
πρός με, he says, meaning me . .
; Aeschin.
2.42
μνημονικῶς εἰπεῖν πρὸς τὰ
. . . in
answer
to . . . ; Dem. 24.190
πρὸς
τοὺς τοιούτους λόγους προακηκοέναι μικρά. (It is well
known how fond Thuc. is of making the leaders of opposing forees
answer one another. Here we may imagine Nicias reminding the A. of
their naval record, and Hermocrates making this
retort.) For πρός cf. Steup
on 3.48.2
ἀίδιον
—Classen understands this of the future, probably rightly. Cf. II.
41.5
πανταχοῦ μνημεῖα ἀίδια
ξυγκατοικίσαντες, that will ‘last for ever.’
ἀλλ’
—bracketed nedlessly by Stahl and
Classen. Do not supply ἔχειν, as
edd. say, or you will get no antithesis to
πάτριον and ἀίδιον.
ἠπειρώτας
—i.e. not a naval
power. The word is often used of Syr. and indeed of Sicily
generally.
ὑπὸ Μήδων
—because
Themistocles persuaded them to build a fleet at the time of the
Persian wars.
γενέσθαι
—does not go after ἀναγκασθέντας, as it is commonly taken, but is parallel with
ἔχειν. Thus ναυτικοὺς γ.
gives the antithesis we wanted.
πρὸς ἄνδρας κ τ.λ.
—it is a
faet well known in business that ‘bounce’ is best auswered with
‘bounee.’ ‘In
dealing with daring men . . . those who in turn show daring appear
most formidable.’
οἵους
—attracted, as often with short
clauses So in Oratio Obliqua short rel.
clauses are sometimes attracted into the infin. χαλεπὸς=‘dangerous,’ as in III.
42.3.
[αὐτοῖς]
—prob. spurious, since πρὸς ἄνδρας τ. seems to be put first so
as to refer to all that follows.
ᾧ
—resumed by τὸ
αὐτὸ.
ἐκεῖνοι
—i.e. ἄνδρες
τολμηροί.
οὐ δυνάμει ἔστιν ὅτε
—for the omission of μὲν cf. c. 1.2
,
προύχοντες
—this is the Attic word. Thuc.
also uses προφέρειν which is Ionic
in this sense c. 64.2; 77.2 .
τῷ
—their.
σφᾶς
—when a plur subj. of infin.
includes the subj. of the main verb as here, whether in whole or in
part, it is put either in nom. or accus. at will. Cf. c. 48.1
ὁ Ν. ἐνόμιζε
. . . λαθεῖν ἂν . . . ποιοῦντες. Andoc. 1, 82 has ἐψηφίσασθε . . . δοκιμάσαντας
ἁναγράψαι, part of the voters being subj. of the
infin.
ὑποσχεῖν
—we expect rather παρασχεῖν: a rare sense of ὑπ‐. See L. and S.; Hesych. ὔπεχε·
πάρεχε.
καὶ Συρακοσίους
—and
so
he knew that by their unexpected boldness in resisting the A.
fleet, the S. would
gain much more through the amazement with which their conduct
would strike the
enemy, than they would lose by their inferiority to the A. in
naval skill.
πλέον τι
—in II. 11
both πλέον τι and ἀμελέστερόν τι are found; the τι indefinitely inereasing the range of
the adv. μᾶλλόν τι is common.
τὸ τοιοῦτον
—such conduct as has been
described; a regular use of τοιοῦτος,
very eommon in Aristotle, and a cause of obscurity
in his style.
ἐπιστήμῃ . . . ἀπειρίαν
—stock
antithesis in Thuc.
εἴ του ἄλλου
—attraction, as Soph. OC 734
πρὸς
πόλιν δ’
ἐπίσταμαι | σθένουσαν ἥκων, εἴ
τιν’ Ἑλλάδος, μέγα .
ὁ δὲ Γ.
—put first for emphasis though the
subj. changes below at αἱ τριήρεις.
This is fairly common in Gk. and Lat.: cf. Cic.
Att. 3.9
Quintus frater quum ex Asia
decessisset, valde fuit ei properandum.
αὐτὸς μὲν
—while
he, paratactic.
αἱ δὲ τριήρεις
—the subj. is presently
subdivided into thirty-five and forty-five.
αἱ δὲ πέντε
—the other
forty-five of them, the art. being often thus added with
the items of a sum total.
τὸ νεώριον
—the docks in the
Great Harbour were probably built by Gelon (485-476). ‘It is less
clear whether he
had any hand in the other haven of the warships, in the Little
Harbour. . . . It was
only by Dionysius that it was brought to perfection,’ after 405.
Freeman.
περιέπλεον
—
i.e round the south point of Ortygia.
βουλόμενοι
—after
τριήρεις, applying to the men in the ships as usual.
ἐντὸς
—sc. τοῦ
μεγάλου λιμένος.
ἀμφοτέρωθεν
—better, as Classen, = ‘by
sea and land’; but Freeman says: ‘the plan was that the one division
should sail across the Great Harbour, while the other sailed round
the Island, so as to attack the A. fleet unexpectedly on both
sides at once.’
ἀντιπληρώσαντες
—antithesis to ἐπλήρουν c. 21,
end. Abresch compares βάλλειν and ἀντι‐ c. 25
, πολιορκεῖν and ἀντι‐ c. 28
, παρατάσσειν and ἀντι‐ c. 5.
ταῖς μὲν
—again the art. in
giving the parts of a whole.
ἐπικαταβάντων
—gone down to
the shore to watch the battle.
προσπεσὼν
—before the
garrisons left in them and the men on the shore could arm.
πρῶτον
—adjective (for nothing further
happens to τὸ μέγιστον)
τοῦ πρώτου ἁλόντος
—that
which was first taken,
πρώτου
being predicate in spite of its order. Cf. c.
13.2.
στρατόπεδον
—
here means the space between the A. walls on the other
side of the harbour.
Freeman
.
ἐξεκομίζοντο
—were
getting
away.
ἡλίσκετο . . ἐτύγχανον
—the two imperfects mark the events as simultaneous.
This would not be so with ἐπειδὴ
if aor. were used. See note on c. 3.3
οἱ ἐξ αὐτῶν φεύγοντες
—cf Andoc. οἱ ὲκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἔφευγον. Attraction of
the preposition is very rare in Latin; e.g. Cic. ad
Fam.
VII. 1 ex illo cubiculo, ex quo
. . . tempoia consumpseris, for in illo . . .
παρέπλευσαν
—sailed
past, and so across the harbour.
ναυμαχοῦσαι
—this order of the
attributive partic. is only possible when the noun has other
attributes besides the partic.; here πρὸ τοῦ
ς.
περὶ ἀλλήλας
—prepositions with ἑαυτοὺς, σφᾶς αὐτοὺς, ἀλλήλους are used
to express reciprocity unless there is a compound of διὰ available.
παρἐδοσαν
—gave away.
καὶ ὑφ’ ὧν
—for καὶ
ἐκείνας ὑφ’ ὧν The antecedent can always be omitted, but
the rel., unless it be either in the nom. or else governed by a
prep., is regulaily attracted. Thus in II. 61
for ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἃ ἔγνωτε we should
prob. read ἐ. οἷς ἔγνωτε.
πλὴν ὅσον
—sc. τῶν
ἀνθρώπων ἦν, a part of εἰμι
being constantly omitted after ὅσος
.
νησιδίῳ
—
the ceremony was gone through on one of the small islets
off
Plemmyriôn; but it was the last act of the invaders on that
side of the
Syr. harbour.
Freeman
.
στρατόπεδον
—as l. 14 above.
ούτως ἐπεπράγεσαν
—used of a bad result,
as in II. 4.
τροπαῖα ἔστησαν αὐτῶν
—the
regular construction.
ἐπισκευάσαντες
—see on c. 1.1
ἐν τῶν τειχῶν τῇ ἁλώσει
—
Classen notes that Herod. and Thuc are fond of inserting the gen.
between a prep.
and its case.
χρήματα
—
bona, non pecuniae. Haacke.
πολλὰ μὲν . . . πολλὰ δὲ
—Thuc. does not use this anaphora so elaborately as most writers. The
instances in him are simple, like εἰ μὲν . .
. εἰ δέ,
ἅμα
μὲν . . . ἅμα δέ. For πολλαὶ
μὲν . . . πολλαὶ
δέ cf. VI. 20.4. Eur.
Rh. 311 has a fourfold anaphora
with πολύς.
ἐμπόρων
—some from Greece,
some from Sicily.
ἐγκατελήφθη
—similar compounds in Thuc.
are ἐγκαταλείπω, ἐγκαθέζομαι,
ἐγκαθίστημι,
ἐγκαθορμίζομαι, ἐγκατοικοδομεῖν, ἐγκατασκήπτειν.
οἱ ἔσπλοι
—because the S. now
commanded the mouth of the harbour.
διὰ μάχης . . . ἐγίγνοντο
—cf. διὰ μάχης ἰέναι
II.
11; Eur. Hel. 978. See also on
c. 8.3. (See Wecklein on Aesch. PB 121.)
ἔς τε
—the τε
is not correlative with either of the preceding negs., but simply
joins the sentences, this being a use of τε
that gradually fell out of Attic prose.
οἵπερ . . . φράσουσιν
—purpose.
ἐν ἐλπίσιν εἰσὶ
—ct. below § 6, and ἐν ἐλπίδι c. 46
The opposite is ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ or ἀπορίᾳ εἶναι
l 10.
τῶν τε π. ἐπιτυχοῦσαι
—Thuc. uses the dat. also
with ἐπιτυγχάνω.
Καυλωνιάτιδι
—neighbourhood
of Caulonia in Bruttium. The whole of this region was πολύδενδρος, and contained ξύλα
ἄφθονα, VI.
90. Pythagoras lived there when driven from Croton.
φυλάξαντες
—for this sense, cf. c. 83
τῆς νυκτὸς φ. τὸ
ἡσυχάζον.
Μεγάροις
—Hyblaean M.: it was
the fourth site on which settled the emigrants from Megara in
Greece.
ἀποφεύγουσιν
—sudden change of subj.; cf.
on c. 4.4.
νεωσοίκων
—prob. built by Gelon, the
second founder of Syracuse. See on c. 22.1,
l. 11. The piles had been driven in during the winter of 415
μυριοφόρον
—of 10,000
talents' burden, assuming with Arnold that a talent was
the ordinary unit of weight: but the matter is not certain. Lobeck
conj.
μυριαμφόρον, but the form is well attested.
ὤνευον
—drew up with
windlasses (ὄνοι).
ὁλκάδος
—i.e. the ναῦς
μυριοφόρος. Notice again the attraction of ἐκ.
τῆς σταυρώσεως ή
κρύφιος
—the hidden part of
the stockade, the adj. assimilated, as with πολύς, ἡμισύς, sometimes ὅσος.
ἦσαν . . . οὓς
—see on c. 11.2,
δεινὸν
—dangerous.
μὴ . . . περιβάλῃ
—epexegetic of προσπλεῦσαι, and so depending on δεινὸν ἦν.
περὶ ἕρμα
—cf. the fine lines of the
Furies in Aesch. Eum. 554
δῑ αἰῶνος δὲ τὸν πρὶν ὄλβον ἕρματι προσβαλὼν
δίκας
ὤλετ’ ἄκλαυστος. Anacreon ἀσήμων
ὑπὲρ
ἑρμάτων φορεῦμαι.
πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα
—M. W. Humphreys examines this
phrase in Class. Rev.
v.
431, and concludes that καὶ
is not needed in connecting ἄλλος with
πολύς, and that when it is inserted, it means
also.
He shows that ἄλλοι πολλοὶ is very
common and πολλοὶ
ἄλλοι not rare.
οἷον εἰκὸς
—note the phrase and cf. εἰκότως.
πείραις
—stratagems.
Bloomfield notes that πεῖρα
implies trickery. Cf. Soph. Aj.
2
πεῖράν τιν’ ἐχθρῶν ἁρπάσαι
.
πόλεις
—of their allies in
Sicily
πρέσβεις . . . Κορινθίων
—not
Syracusans, in order that greater credence might be given to the
message (Haacke).
ἀγγέλλοντας
—see on c. 3.1. 52
τῆς ναυμαχίας πέρι
—they would of course not send
an embassy round to report the defeat (this would be τὴν ναυμαχίαν), but, as the news was
sure to spread, to give explanations.
δηλώσοντας
—the constr. changes from
pres. to fut., as in II. 44
οὐκ ὀλοφύρομαι μᾶλλον ἢ παραμυθήσομαι;
cf. Tac. An.
I. 18
interficietis
quam desciscitis.
ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς
—against
the
A.
διαπεπολεμησόμενον
—the accus. abs joined
to gen. as in c. 15.1, and Plato, Rep. p. 604 B ὡς οὔτε
δήλου ὄντος . .
οὔτε ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν οὐδὲν προβαῖνον. Cf. Livy
23.13
debellatum fore
(fut. perf. infin. pass.), si adniti
voluissent.
ἔπρασσον
—of negociation or
diplomacy, as often.
μαχαιροφόρων
—the wearing of
dirks is a well-known custom of some of the Thracian tribes.
τοῦ Διακοῦ
—the Dii were
independent and lived mostly in the region of the Rhodope or Despoto
mountains.
οὓς ἔδει
—should
have, according to arrangement. M.T.
415.
ὕστερον
— ‘too late,’ as in ὕστερον παρεγενοντο, ἦλθον.
ὅθεν
—antecedent omitted, as in Dem. 45.81
ανάγειν
ὅθεν
εἴληφας. Andoc. 1, 64 ἔλαβον
ὅθεν ὁρμώμενοι ταῦτ’
ἐποίουν.
ἔχειν
—keep.
τὸν ἐκ τῆς Δ.
πόλεμον
—the incursions from
D.; not the same as ὁ Δεκελεικὸς
πόλεμος, as ancient authors call the war from 413.
δραχμὴν
—double the ordinary
pay of a hoplite.
ἐπειδὴ γὰρ
—from the
time
that D. was occupied for the injury of the country, at first by
the whole army,
after being fortified by it during this summer, and afterwards
by garrisons reheving
one another at fixed intervals. (This trans. takes ὑπὸ
πάσης τῆς ς. both with
τειχισθεῖσα and with ἐπῳκεῖτο,
not, as is usually done, with τειχισθεῖσα
only)
φρουραῖς
—replacing the gen. with ὑπό.
ἔβλαπτε
—the subj. to be supplied is ἡ Δ. τειχισθεῖσα.
ὀλέθρῳ
—a strong word, ‘devastation,’
like the vastitas Italiae which Hannibal saw
in a vision. ὄλεθρος is not
generally used with things; it is as though a pest were destroying
their resources
βραχεῖαι
—the average
duration of the previous invasions had only been about a month, i.e.
as long as
provisions held out.
ὁτὲ μὲν . . . ὁτὲ δὲ
—does not occur elsewhere in good Attic prose. Xen. Hier. 1, 5
has ἔστι μὲν ὄτε . . . ἔστι δ’
ὅτε, and the edd. compare Plato,
Phacdo, p 59 A ὁτὲ μὲν . . . ἑνίοτε δὲ
and Theaet. p. 207 D ὁτὲ
μὲν . . . τοτὲ δέ.
πλειόνων ἐπιόντων
—VIZ.
arriving from the Peloponnese to overrun Attica. The Spartans
expected the
occupation of Decelea would at once cripple the A. in Sicily. It did
not do so:
therefore special efforts were from time to time made by sending
extra troops. The
A. had done much the same at the beginning of the war in the case of
Potidaea.
ἐξ ἀνάγκης
—of
necessity, to provision the garrison.
τῆς ἴσης φρουρᾶς
—the
normal garrison; in ἴσης
he is thinking of the successive garrisons.
οὐκ ἐκ παρέργου
—non
obiter. His father Archidamus had been accused of slackness in
his conduct of the war.
τῆς . . . χώρας . . .
ἐστέρηντο
—
στερεῖν is to withhold something forcibly or fraudulently
from its owner; as Demosth. speaks of himself as ἐστερημένος τῶν πατρῴων by his
guaidians.
ἐν γῇ ἀποκρότῳ
—with
ἀπεχωλοῦντο; the two causes being expressed in different
constructions, as often. Xen. in his treatise on riding refers to
the roughness of the ground in parts of Attica, and gives advice to
riders.
ξυνεχῶς ταλαιπωροῦντες
—by
continual fatigue.
Ὠρωποῦ
—at this time O.
belonged to Athens. It fell into the hands of Boeotia in 412.
πολυτελὴς
—the question of
finance was now becoming serious. Want of money finally ruined A in
the war.
τῶν τε πάντων
—so all
that
the city needed had to be imported, and thus it ceased to be a
city and became a
fortress.
τῇ ἐπἀλξει
—collective, as in II. 13. So Livy
23.16.8 uses vallum ferre for vallos f.
ἐφ’ ὅπλοις που
—at
camping-stations here and there.
ὅπλα are military posts within the
city, as distinct from τὸ τεῖχος,
which stands for the fortifications generally, being used
collectively. (One must agree with Muller-Strnbing that που is whimsical and poor. If it is
genuine, Thuc. is at fault.)
l. 16
τό γ’ ἄν
—the following clauses, (1) ἀποστῆναι, (2)
ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, (3) ποιῆσαι,
are in explanatory apposition to the preceding ἥν, which=
φιλονικίαν. The ἂν
belongs to all three clauses. Hence what would have seemed
incredible is this: εἰ αὐτοὶ πολιορκοῖντο .
. , οὑδ’ ἂν ὣς
ἀποσταῖεν ἐκ Σ, ἀλλὰ . . ἀντιπολιορκοῖεν ἄν, καὶ τοσοῦτον ἂν τὸν
παράλογον ποιήσειαν κ τ λ. Hence, trans. literally, ‘And
yet (though they had two wars) their pertinacity was such that no
man before it was experienced would have believed the account of it,
that, even if they were themselves besieged by the P. by means of a permanent occupation, they would not even so withdraw
from S., but would in turn lay siege in the same manner to Syr. (a
city which taken alone is as large as A) and would astonish the
Greeks with such a display of strength and audacity that, whereas at
the beginning of the war the Greeks generally supposed that they
would hold out perhaps for a year, perhaps for two years, possibly
for three, but certainly not longer than three, if the P. should
invade Attica, they on the contrary in the seventeenth year after
the first invasion should actually go to S. . . . and voluntarily
take on themselves another war.’
μηδ’ ὣς
—ὣς
(=οὕτως) only appears in prose in καὶ ὥς, οὐδ’ ὥς, μηδ’ ὥς; occasionally
before οὖν, as III.
37.5. 20
αὐτήυ γε καθ’ αὑτὴυ
—i e.
without reckoning Sparta at all; that is to say, Syr. would have
been a big city for A. to besiege even if she were not herself in
difficulties at the time. (Others think this means (a) without counting the Athenian empire, (b) without reckoning allies on either side.)
τοσοῦτον
—answered by ὅσον.
ὅσον
—when two things, persons, or sets
of persons are compared by means of τοσοῦτον
. . .
ὅσον, there are often two clauses following the
ὅσον: these two clauses are then themselves contrasted
by μὲν and
δὲ—here οἱ μὲν . . . οἱ δὲ ἔτει—and
they describe the extent of the difference between the two things
compared in the
τοσοῦτον clause. (See Appendix II.) Here ‘the A.
astonished the Greek world so much that the Greek world thought they
would hold out a year or two, whereas the A. after all these years
undertook the Sicilian expedition’
<οἱ μὲν> οἱ μὲν οἱ δὲ οἱ δὲ γε οἱ
δὲ
—when these particles are thus
repeated, it is usual to find the extremes contrasted, as here <οἱ μὲν> and the last οἱ δέ, i.e. the Greeks at large and
Athens. The first <οἱ μὲν>
is subdivided in the clauses that follow it.
οἱ δὲ τριῶν γε ἐτῶν
—δέ γε
or δὲ . . . γε caps a previous
statement. οὺδεὶς is in limiting
apposition to οἱ δὲ, and τριῶν
ἐτῶν is gen. of comparison.
τὴν πρώτην ἐσβολὴν
—in June
431.
ἦλθον
—Thuc. here proceeds as if he had
said τοσοῦτον τὸν παράλογον έποἱησαν
instead of τος οῦτον τὀν π. ποιῆσαι ἂν—
shifting the point of view which was that of a person hearing of
such vigour before he actually witnessed it.
τῷ πολέμῳ . . .
τετρυχωμένοι
—at the time of the
expedition A. had
been recovering for seven years; but Thuc. here thinks of the state
of A. in 415 as
contrasted with her state in 431.
δῑ ἃ
—the plur. beeause he sums up all
the causes that led to their impoverisation, namely the losses of individuals
and the losses of
the treasury resulting from the φιλονικία above described.
καὶ τότε
—other causes of
impoverisation are now added, namely those resulting from the
fortification of
Decelea. ‘For these reasons and because of the serious damage which
was being then
caused by D. and the other expenses that fell heavily on them.’
ὑπὸ τῆς Δ. . . .
βλαπτούσης
—this construction, in
which the partic. has the force of a verbal subst., is less common
in Gk. than in Latin (ante urbem
conditam). It seems that it is not used unless the noun and
prep. would make sense without the partic;
the only exception being ἅμα with
expressions of time. Cf. c. 42.2
διὰ τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχιζομένην ; II. 49
μετὰ ταῦτα
λωφήσαντα. It is oftenest found with ἅμα, μετὰ with accus., and ἐπὶ with gen., as Herod.
I. 15
ἐπὶ τούτου τυραννεύοντος.
(See Gildersleeve in A. J. P. July '92)
τῶν . . προσπιπτόντων
— gen.
abs., the two causes being again differently expressed.
ἀδύνατοι . . . τοῖς χρήμασι
—on the analogy of δύνατος and
δύναμαι with dat.
τὴν εἰκοστὴν
—a tax of five per cent on
all imports and exports within the A. empire. Probably this system
lasted, with the exception of Chalcedon (? others), to the end of
the war. είκοστολόγοι were
appointed to collect it in the different poits, and, according to
Aristophanes, they sometimes carried on smuggling on their own
account; and Aegina seems to have become a sort of depot for
contraband goods smuggled out of Attic territory to the Peloponnese.
Aegina was a free port. (Cf. Gilbert, Beitrage zur
innern Geschichte Athens, p. 286.) The establishment of the εἰκοστὴ is the beginning of important
financial reforms.
καὶ πρίν
—as
before.
πολλῷ μείζους . . . ὅσῳ καὶ
μείζων
—a double compar or
superl. is the way to express proportion. Cf. I. 68
προσήκει ἡμᾶς
οῦχ ἥκιστα εὶπεῖν, ὅσῳ καὶ μέγιστα
έγκλήματα ἔχομεν; c. 41.3
.
τῷ Δ. ὑστερήσαντας
—who
came too late for D. to use them.
Διειτρέφει
—Pausanias
I. 23 describes a statue at Athens of D. pierced with arrows,
presumably in the act of regaining his ship (see c. 30.1) after the barbarous slaughter of
the children of Mycalessus The inscribed base of this statue is
extant.
εἰπόντες . . . βλάψαι
—
λέγω is constructed with accus. and infin. regularly (a) when it = κελεύω,
as here: (b) when used in the sense of ferunt,
fertur. It is then oftener in the
pass., but the act. is
found so. When Thuc. wants to imply that a statement is false, he
says λέγεται
ὡς. Instances of λέγω
with accus. and infinit. in the sense of
φημὶ are not common.
Χαλκίδος
—after ravaging the
country round Tanagia, they had crossed to Euboea.
ἀφ’ ἑσπέρας
—cf. ἀπὸ
πρώτου ὕπνου c. 43.2.
Μυκαλησσόν
—the destruction
of this town, so ancient that its foundation was said to be
contemporary with
Cadmus, was in every way disgraceful and revolting. Pausanias says
the place was in
ruins in his day, and there are still considerable remains both of
the acropolis and
of the lower town.
Ἑρμαίῳ
—shrine of
H. on the road from the coast to Thebes.
ἀπροσδοκήτοις
=οὐ
προσδεχομένοις, active. Many adj. have both an act. and
pass meaning, e.g. φοβερός, ἀδεής,
προστρόπαιος, and so in Lat.
formidolosus, etc. Sallust, Cat. 39, 2.
Cf. on c. 42.3, line 24.
ἔστιν ᾗ . . . τοῦ δὲ
—cf. c.
2.4.
βραχέος ᾠκοδομημένου
—cf. II. 34.8
βῆμα
ὑψηλὸν πεποιημένον .
l 26.
τοὺς ἀνθρώπους
—Pausanias
says that a man would have searched in vain in his day for
descendants of the
inhabitants of Mycalessus.
πάντας . . . ὅτῳ
—like ἕκαστος,
οὐδείς, πᾶς τις, τις referring to a plur.
ὁμοῖα
—for ὁμοίως,
as several times in Herod., but in no other Attic prose author.
Thuc. also has ἴσα for ἴσως.
τοῖς μάλιστα
—sc.
φονικοῖς. This idiom is found also in Herod. and in late
writers. Josephus speaks of a man called by the Jews Θρᾳκίδαν
διὰ τὴν τῆς ὠμότητος ὑπερβολήν.
ἐν ᾧ ἂν
—whenever,
ἐν ᾧ describing all the attendant
circumstances
θαρσήσῃ
—ingressive
ἰδέα πᾶσα
—Thuc is fond of
this expression.
καὶ ἄρτι ἔτυχον
—notice that the rel. is
dropped in the second clause, as very often Generally, however, a
demonstrative is added instead, as in II. 4
ὃ ἦν τοῦ τείχους καὶ αἱ θύραι ἔτυχον ἀνεῳγμέναι
αὐτοῦ. Cf. Hooker in the Eccles. Pol.
‘Whom although to know be life, and joy to make mention of His
name.’ Also ‘Whose fan is in His hand and He will throughly purge
His floor’ Livy, 23, 8 Cum
quo . . . steterat, nec eum . .
. patria majestas sententia depulerat. 37-8.
ἔτυχον . . ἐσεληλυθότες
—the perf. is
necessary to make the partic. precede ἔτυχον
(ἔλαθον ἔφθασα) in time; as in
2.4
ἔτυχον . . . ἀνεῳγμέναι
.
κατέκοψαν πάντας
—Freeman well says that
this ‘deed of blood outdid all crimes of Greek
against Greek, and sent a shudder through all Hellas.’ But, after
all, Napoleon III. got the throne of France by acts as infamous.
ξυμφορὰ . . . αὕτη
—this
was a calamity to the whole city unparalleled in severity, and
fell upon it with
singular suddenness and horror. Each of the expressions
appended to ξυμφορὰ adds a new
point: (a) it was universal—πάσῃ, (b) it was
greater than others—οὐδεμιᾶς
ἥσσων, (c) it was quite sudden
and very horrible.
οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων
—i.e. ‘greater than any,’
as in Aesch. PB
1013 (αὐθαδία) αὐτὴ
καθ’ αὑτὴν οὐδενὸς μεῖζον σθένει=‘less than anything.’ Dem.
1.27
ἡ τῶν πραγμάτων αἰσχύνη
οὐδεμιᾶς ἐλάττων ζημίας
τοῖς
γε σώφροσι. Cf. cc. 71 and 85. Note that ἥσσων
ἢ μηδὲν would mean less than (the abstract idea
of)
nothing.
μᾶλλον ἑτέρας
—a common idiom
in place of a superlative.
προκεχωρηκότας
—on the return
march to the coast.
ἀφείλοντο . . .
καταδιώκουσιν
—see on c. 3.4 .
ἐν τῇ ἐσβἀσει τοὺς
πλείστους
—it appears below that,
out of 1300, the
number of those killed was 250. Hence the sense ‘most of those who
were killed fell
whilst embarking.’
ἔξω τοξεύματος
—out of
range,
Xen. Cyr. I. 4.23,
like ἔξω βελῶν. Eur. Orest. 1531
εἴσω ξίφους. Livy, 22, 15, 8 priusquam
ad conjectum teli veniret.
ἐπεὶ ἔν γε τῇ
ἄλλῃ
—whereas elsewhere in
the retreat they
ran forward
from the line and closed in together and protected themselves
with skill after the
fashion of their country against the Th. cavalry . . ., and so
only a few of them
fell during this.
ἐν τούτῳ
—neut., like ἐν ῳ c. 29.4
.
τῶν Θρᾳκῶν
—depends on πεντήκοντα καὶ δ.
ἀπὸ
—cf. c. 87.6
ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν. 22
βοιωταρχῶν
—Thebes elected
two of the eleven chiefs of the Boeotian confederacy.
ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει
—pro
civitatis magnitudine, Portus: but it is uncertain whether τῆς πόλεως or τοῦ
πάθους should be supplied. See Classen on c.
113.4.
ὀλοφύρασθαι ἀξίῳ
—in Lat. with dignus, aptus, the infin. is used only in
poetry and Silver prose. Also the pass. infin. is used, while in Gk.
the act or mid. is regular.
τότε
—refers to c.
26.3.
ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς
—the prep. is attracted to ἀποπλέων.
Φειᾷ
—now Katakolo, the
landing-place for visitors to Olympia.
ἔπλεον
—proceeded on
the
voyage.
Ζάκυνθον καὶ Κ
— the policy and interests of Zacynthus coincided with those of Corcyra. In 430
Sparta made an effort to obtain Z., but failed. Cephallenia, after
remaining for a time neutral, joined Athens in the autumn of 431.
Pericles had seen that the possession of the islands which lay on
the road to Sicily was of extreme importance, and already in 433 he
began to form alliances with them This was not with a view to
invading Sicily, but to prevent Sparta from obtaining help from
Syracuse, her ally, and from controlling the route to Sicily.
τῶν Μεσσηνίων
—sc. ὁπλίτας.
Ἀκαρνανίας
—all Acarnania,
except Oeniadae, had made an alliance with Athens in the autumn of
430, and
Demosthenes himself had taken Oeniadae into the alliance in 424.
Ἀλύζειαν
—near the coast of
Acarnania. Here Timotheus, son of Conon, set up his trophy in 375
during his
successful voyage to restore Athenian supremacy in the north-west.
Ἀνακτόριον
—had been an ally of Sparta;
but it was seized by the Athenians at Naupactus and the Acarnanians
in 425. Hence αὐτοὶ=οἱ
Ἀθηναῖοι.
περὶ ταῦτα
—occupied
in
this.
περὶ is much
commoner in this sense than ἀμφί,
which prep. occurs only twice in Thuc. and not at all in the
Orators.
τότε
—see c.
16.2. τότε is often used in
referring back to what has been already mentioned. Cf. c.
31.1, 81, 2.
κατὰ πλοῦν
—cf. καθ’
ὁδόν, κατὰ τὴν πορείαν, κατὰ τὴν στρατηγίαν.
Κόνων
—the admiral and
statesman who opposed Thrasybulus at the end of the war. After
Aegospotami he lived
in exile in Cyprus. In 394 he won the battle of Cnidus after which
he rebuilt the
walls of Athens. He was probably sent to Naupactus in 414.
κατοκνοῦσι
—the MSS. καταλυουσι is not appropriate, because
there could be no question of bringing the war to an end, since the
fortification of Decelea. (Classen's explanation is that war was not
yet declared between Αthens and
the Peloponnesians. But, if not, between whom is ὁ πόλεμος? It certainly had not been
declared between the Corinthian ships and the A. squadron.)
πέμπειν
—the request points
to the decline of Athenian naval supremacy.
ὡς . . . οὔσας
—even the partic. of personal verbs sometimes stand with their
nouns in the accus. abs. . . if they are preceded by ὡς or ὥσπερ
.
M.T. 853.
δυοῖν δεούσας εἴκοσι
— the
number of A. ships at Naupactus was generally twenty.
τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸν ξ
—cf. c. 24.2
. περὶ governs τὸν ξ.
ἀποτραπόμενος
—turning
back from his homeward voyage. Fr. Muller renders ‘after
his return from Sicily.’
ὥσπερ καὶ ᾑρέθη
—not as στρατηγός, which office he had held
since Hecatombaeon 414, while the election
was probably early in 414, but as colleague,
ξυνάρχων, of Demosth. in this expedition.
οἱ δὲ . . . πρέσβεις
—the subj. is again placed
first for emphasis, in spite of ὁ
Νικίας below. Cf. 3.4.1.
It is not common.
τότε
—as in c.
31.3.
μετὰ τὴν τοῦ Π. ἅλωσιν
—why would not μετὰ Πλημμύριον ἡ?ρημένον do? See on c. 28.4, l. 32
οἰχόμενοι
—attributive,
though not under the art.
τοὺς τὴν δ. ἔχοντας
—who
commanded the route.
Κεντόριπας
—Centuripa, now
Centorbi, a very ancient Sicel town S. W. of Etna, of which it
commands a splendid
view.
Ἀλικυαίους
—the only Alicyae
known in Sicily is in the N. W. and cannot be meant here.
διαφρἠσωσι
—a rare word, but
well attested by the explanations given of it by ancient
grammarians.
πειράσειν
—see on c. 12.2. In Attic
πειρῶμαι=conari, and only Herod.
and Thuc. among prose anthors use the act.=
conari.
Ἀκραγαντῖνοι
— the great
Sicel leader Ducetrus had attacked Acragas, which sought aid from
Syr. 451. But
Ducetius defeated the two. Then he was defeated by Syr., and sent to
live at
Corinth. He was allowed to return in 446, to the disgust of Acragas,
which now
retained its jealousy of Syr.
ἀφυλάκτοις τε καὶ
ἐξαίφνης
— the circumstances
are differently expressed, as in c. 18.1.
Cf. Tacitns An. 1, 23 fletu
et
pectus atque os manibus verberans.
Καμαριναῖοι
—C. had
previously been neutral. Its relations with Syr. had not been
satisfactory.
Originally an outpost of Syr., it had revolted from its mother-city
and had been
destroyed circ. 550. Subsequently it became part of Gela. In 484
Gelon transferred
its population to Syr.; and in 461 it was re-colonised by Gela.
Γελῷοι
—they had previously promised to
send στρατιὰν οὐ πολλήν c. 1.4. In 498 Hippocrates, tyrant of Gela,
defeated the Syracusans; his successor Gelon transferred his seat to
Syr.
σχεδόν τι
—almost, since
some towns still remained faithful to A.; see c. 57.11 .
l. 9
οὐδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων
—regular
phrase for ‘neutral.’
οἱ δ’ ἄλλοι
—this resumes the subject πᾶσα ἡ Σικελία
after the
parenthesis. Cf. Andoc I. 78, in the
psephism of Patroclides, ὅσα όνόματα τῶν
τετρακοσίων
τινὸς ἐγγέγραπται . . . πλὴν ὁπόσα ἐν στήλαις γέγραπται . . . τὰ
δὲ
ἄλλα πάντα έξαλεῖψαι.
ἐπέσχον τὸ . . .
ἐπιχειρεῖν
— ‘refrained from
attacking’ (Some edd wrongly compare II.
81.4
οὔτ’ ἐπέσχον τὸ στρατόπεδον
καταλαβεῖν, where if the text is sound the sense must be
‘did not intend to occupy the camp,’ not ‘did
not refrain from occupying a camp.’)
τὸν Ἰόνιον
—sc.
κόλπον.
Χοιράδας
—two islands off
Tarentum.
Μεσσαπίου
—one of the three
divisions of Iapygia, Messapia, extended from Tarentum to
Brundisium.
Ἄρτᾳ
—he seems to have been a man of note
in his day, for Athenaeus reters to him as μέγας
καὶ λαμπρός.
δυνάστῃς
—suggested a foreign, un-Greek
form of government. Hence the bad sense of
δυναστεία, which is used, for instance, of the Thirty.
Μεταπόντιον
—there are ruins
of a temple on the site. The Romans destroyed it for having sided
with Hannibal.
Pausanias saw a theatre and walls standing. Pythagoras died there.
ἀναλαβόντες ταῦτα
—taking
these with them; the neut. is used as in c. 14.2 .
Θουρίαν
—on the site of Sybaris. In 193
B.C. it became a Latin Colony—called Copia—after the great extension
of the ager Romanus in Bruttium. Thurii was
colonised by Athens in 443. Herodotus was among the colonists.
εἴ τις ὑπελέλειπτο
—best taken with ἁθροίσαντες.
ἐν τούτῳ τύχης
—the expulsion
of the anti-Athenian party would make an offensive and defensive
alliance possible.
τῶν ὁλκάδων
—depends on κομιδῆς.
ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ
—Thuc. uses also ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν. Similarly ἐπὶ is used with either the gen. or
dat. of place in the same phrases.
ἔτι
—of additional ships.
ἐλάσσους . . . τῶν
Ἀττικῶν
νεῶν
—this might have
been ἐ.
τῶν
Ἀθηναίων, i.e. ἢ τοῖς
Ἀθηναίοις. Cf. VIII 53 ναῦς
οὐκ
ἐλάσσους σφῶν ἔχουσι.
κατα Ἐρινεὸν
—east of Rhium,
which, with Antirrhium on the opposite coast, commanded the entrance
to the Gulf.
Had the Corinthians been superior in numbers, they would have lain
off Rhium, S. W.
of Naupactus, and have tried to shut in the A.
καὶ αὐτοῖς
—the dative is put early to
contrast it with οἱ δ’ Ἀθηναῖοι
below.
αὐτόθεν
— from Achaea, which
had originally been neutral, but in 417 joined Sparta.
ἀνεχοὐσαις
—see L and S., B.; cf. Herod. VII. 123
πάσης
πῆς
Παλλήνης ἀνέχει μάλιστα. The meaning is common in
Pausanias.
Πολυάνθης
—prob. the same as
the P. to whom, according to Xenophon, Tithraustes sent a bribe in
order to bring
about a war against Sparta.
τριάκοντα . . . καὶ τρισίν
— in c. 31.4 the number is given as eighteen.
Demosth. had added ten; and the rest must have come with Diphilus.
ἁπλῶς
—with
κατέδυ, absolutely. (Holden takes this with οὐδεμία, but there is no reason for
emphasising this.)
ἑπτὰ δέ τινες
—the
τινες shows he was not certain of the exact number.
ἐμβαλλόμεναι
—technically the ἐμβολὴ was a charge broadside with the ἔμβολον; προσβολὴ a charge prow to
prow.
ἐπωτίδας
—τὰ
ἑκατέρωθεν πρῴρας ἐξέχοντα ξύλα, Schol. The anchors hung
from them.
ἀντίπαλα
— internal accus., defining the
verb. Hence=ἀντίπαλον ναυμαχίαν.
The plur. presents the details.
ὡς
—the only case in which Thuc. uses ὡς for ὥστε.
The use is common in Aeschylus, Sophocles, Herod., Xen.
αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους
—the nom. would be more
regular; but the subjects are not really identical, since the infin.
clause is meant to be general. It appears
from what follows that the A. did not finally consider themselves
victors.
αὐτῶν
=τῶν
ναυαγίων. For the two gens. cf. I. 25
κατὰ τὴν Φαιάκων προενοίκησιν τῆς Κερκύρας.
See Classen on III. 116.6.
οὐκέτι
—note (1) the adv. qualifying the
noun: it is common with the neg., and verbal nouns often take the
construction of the verb, as II. 65
ὑπὸ τοῦ πρώτου ἀνδρὸς ἀρχή: (2) the use
of οὐκέτι, denoting a change of
purpose or a disappointment of expectation.
οἱ ἕτεροι
—sc.
ἐνόμισαν.
οἵ τε . . . οἵ τ’
—the double
τε shows that the two clauses are exactly parallel. Thuc.
is fond of this τε . . . τε
joining two concurrent acts.
κρατεῖν εἰ μὴ κ.τ.λ.
—this is
not a mere subtlety. The naval superiority of the A., esp. at
Naupactus, had been so
repeatedly acknowledged that the Cor. rightly considered that not to
be beaten
constituted a victory.
ὅτι οὐ π. ἐνίκων
—the indic. shows that Thuc.
states this as a fact: νικῷεν
would mean that the A. reflected οὐ νικῷμεν
.
αὖθις
—referring to the
previous sea-fight.
ἄλλῃ
—as well. cf. c. 4.3.
παρασκευῇ
—force.
τοῦ πεζοῦ
—what is called the gen. of
material. Rutherford Syn. § 106.
πρὶν ἐλθεῖν
—depends on φθάσαι. πρὶν regularly takes aor. infin. unless
continuance or attempt is implied.
ξυνέλεγον
—equivalent to
pluperf. in a rel. clause. It is like the historic pres. for aor.
ὡς
—in such a manner
as
would give them the advantage according to what they had learned
from the former
battle. 8-9.
τι πλέον . . . σχήσοντες
—cf. πλέον
τί ἐστι with dat., and πλέον
τι ποιεῖν. Cf. on § 5,
ἐνεῖδον
=to learn by
experience in action.
ξυντεμόντες ἐς
ἔλασσον
—shortening.
ἀντήριδας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν
—stays of
timber which extended from the cat-heads through the sides of the
ship, and
projected nine feet both ways, inside and outside.
τοῖχος
—wall of a building: τεῖχος wall of a town. For a similar
distinction cf τέμαχος slice of
fish: τόμος slice of meat.
πρῴραθεν
—with
ἐπισκευασάμενοι, strengthening them at the
prow.
διὰ τὸ μὴ
—because
they
rowed round and struck the enemy broadside, and did not meet him
prow to
prow.
οὐκ ἐν πολλῷ
—for ἐν
οὐ πολλῷ: cf. II. 102, and μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ
II.
17.2 .
πρὸς ἑαυτῶν
—so πρὸς
τῶν πολεμίων c. 49.2. Not a
common use.
πρὸς κοῖλα
—sc. τὰ
ἔμβολα.
σφῶν
—with περίπλουν
οὔτε δ. For the order cf. II.
5.5
σφῶν πειραθέντες καταλαβεῖν
τὴν πόλιν. It is put in contrast with Ἀθηναίοις
περίπλουν
—the manœuvre of
rowing round and ‘boring’ the enemy's vessels into a small space, so
as to throw
them into confusion.
διέκπλουν
—the manœuvre of ‘rowing
through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in
their rear, . . . and before the ship of the adversary could change
its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak
part.’ Grote. It is first heard of in Herod. VI.
12.
ᾦπερ τῆς τέχνης
—which
were the very manœuvres on which they depended most.
αὐτοὶ γὰρ κ.τ.λ.
—for
they themselves as far as possible would not, on the one hand,
give them a chance of
breaking their line, while the want of pace, on the other hand,
would prevent them
from boring them in.
τὸ μὲν . . . τὸ δὲ
—adverbial, as τὰ μὲν . . . τὰ δέ, τοῦτο μὲν . . . τοῦτο
δέ.
οὐ δώσειν διέκπλουν
—so II.
83.5
οὐ διδόντες διέκπλουν .
κωλύσειν ὥστε
—in Thuc. verbs of
advising, preventing, and agreeing—as πείθειν,
εἴργειν, ξυμβαίνειν—most commonly take ὥστε among verbs that can take the
simple infin.
τῇ τε πρότερον
—they
would purposely employ the system of charging prow to prow,
which was before
considered want of skill in their pilots.
τὸ ἀντίπ
ρῳρον ξυγκροῦσαι is put as the supposed definition of ἀμαθία τῶν κυβερνητῶν, and the form of
the sentence is an example of the effect which Thuc. produces by
emphasising single words—here ἀμαθίᾳ.
Thuc. much prefers giving
definitions to giving examples;
whereas in later oratory examples,
παραδείγματα, are commoner. For the
example, cf. II.
42.2, δοκεῖ δέ μοι δηλοῦν ἀνδρος
ᾶρετὴν (‘virtue in a man,’ as ἀμαθίᾳ
κυβερνητοῦ here) . . . ἡ νῦν τῶνδε
καταστροφή.
ἀντίπρῳρον
—agreeing with the indef.
subject of ξυγκροῦσαι.
ξυγκροῦσαι
—probably trans., as elsewhere
in classical Greek. It is easy to supply τὴν
ναῦν.
πλεῖστον . . . σχήσειν
—as there is no other
case of the superl with ἔχειν,
Kruger wishes to read πλέον for πλεῖστον, Stahl
περισχήσειν for σχήσειν.
But πλεῖστον
σχήσειν does not mean they would be very
superior to, but rather ‘they would find very great
(advantage)’ The phrase may be compared with Aristoph. Acharn. 474
ἐν ᾧπέρ
ἐστι πάντα μοι τὰ πράγματα. Thuc. rather affects
ἔχω in place of ἐστι,
as in II. 4
ἐμπείρους
ἔχοντες τοὺς διώκοντας instead of ἔμπειροι
ἧσαν αὐτοῖς οἱ δ.; and here the other construction
immediately follows. So too the phrases πλέον
ἔχω and πλέον ἐστι are
the same. Aristoph. Plut. 531
τί πλέον πλουτεῖν ἐστιν;
τὴν γὰρ ἀνάκρουσιν
—for
if driven back the A. would not be able to back in any direction
except on to the
shore, and that only through a short distance and to a small
part, namely in the
coast-line of their own camp.
άνάκρουσις means backing for a new
attack.
ἐξωθουμένοις
—technical word
for being thrust back or ashore in a sea fight, and driven back in a
land battle.
ταύτην
—sc. τὴν
γῆν. Both the distance to the land and the stretch of
coast in their power would be small.
ξυμφερομένους . . . ἐς
ὀλίγον
—forced to
meet in a small space.
ταράξεσθαι
—passive in sense, ταραχθήσομαι not being used until late
Greek.
περιπλεῦσαι δὲ
—the
enemy
would not be able to sail round them into the open water, since
they had power to
charge from the open sea and to retire.
εὐρυχωρίαν
—outside the harbour, =τὸ πέλαγος.
τὴν ἐπίπλευσιν . . . τε καὶ
ἀνάκρουσιν
—first to charge, and
then, when the enemy
attempted to sail round them, to retire with the intention of
charging again. The
two words need not be part of the same movement, although the art.
is not repeated.
πολεμίου
—even if by quick
sailing the A. had it in their power to sail round the Syr., yet
they would be
caught between the retiring Syr. and the hostile posts at the mouth.
οὐ μεγάλου
—thus Plem. and
Ortygia controlled the whole width of the mouth.
τῆς δὲ ἡμέρας
—after
testing each other for a great part of the day by advancing and
retiring.
προσπλέοντες καὶ ἀ.
gives the manner in which they tested each other.
παραλαβεῖν
—win.
εἰ μὴ . . . καταδύσαντες
—cf. Eur. Med. 369
δοκεῖς
γὰρ ἄν με τόνδε θωπεῦσαί ποτε
εἰ μή τι κερδαίνουσαν ἢ
τεχνωμένην; It is not necessary to supply παρέλαβον.
ἀντίπαλα
—that the result of
the fighting had been indecisive.
ἐλπίζων
—expecting. N. did
not desire a fresh engagement; but he knew that the slight success
won by the Syr. would prompt them to renew the attack before the A.
reinforcements should arrive. Freeman says that it was ‘the obvious
A. policy to avoid further action till those reinforcements came.’
τριηράρχους
—Diodorus XIII. 10 says the trierarchs were eager for
a fresh battle. Plutarch Nic. 20 says the new
generals, Menander and Euthydemus, were eager to achieve distinction
before Demosthenes should arrive.
ἐπεπονήκει
—Pollux gives κακοῦσθαι as an equivalent.
σταυρώματος
—this had been
made in the spring of 414.
λιμένος κλῃστοῦ
—such ‘closed harbours’
were common in Greece. Col. Leake Top. of Athens
p. 311 says that ‘the walls, being carried down to either side of
the harbour's mouth, were prolonged from thence across the mouth
upon shoals, or artifieial moles, until a passage only was left in
the middle for two or three triremes abreast between two towers, the
opening of which might be further protected by a chain.’ The three
harbours of Piraeus—Cantharus, Munichia, Zea—were so closed in 429
B.C.
διαλειπούσας
—the transports, two hundred
feet apart, were so stationed as to guard the gaps in the σταύρωμα. See on c. 41.1.
καθ’
ἡσυχίαν
—nudisturbcd,
the regular meaning of the phrase in Thuc. Cf. κατὰ σκότον=clam.
παρασκευαζόμενοι
. . .
διετέλεσαν
—the only
instance of διατελῶ with partic,
in Thuc. διατελῶ,
τυγχάνω, and φαίνομαι
are often constructed with adjectives alone, as ἀσφαλέστατος ἂν
διατελοίη
I. 34.2.
μέχρι νυκτὸς
—the art.
omitted as usual with words denoting time.
τῆς . . . ὥρας πρῴτερον
—lit. earlier
in point of time, as in τότε τοῦ
χειμῶνος.
ἐπιχειρήσει
—mode of
attack.
πρὶν δὴ
—introduees the decisive moment,
as δὴ often does.
Ἀρίστων . . . ἄριστος ὢν
—a curious paronomasia. It is
not probable that it is accidental, since Thuc. is clearly rather
fond of this ‘figure’ (σχῆμα
λέξεως), as may be seen from a few instances in this
book: (1) c. 70.8
φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν (this is traductio); (2) c.
85.3
οὐ πολὺ . . . πολύ;
(3) c. 55.1
μέγας
. . μείζων, and c. 68.2
ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι; (4) c. 70.4
ἐμβολαὶ . .
προσβολαί; (5) c. 81.5
ἀποκινδυνεύειν . . . ἀπονενοημένους;
(6) c. 21.3
τολμηροὺς
. . . ἀντιτολμῶντας, c. 42.2
παρατείχισμα . . .
περιτείχισμα, c. 69.2
ἐπιφανεῖς
. . . άφανίζειν; (7) c. 39.2
, αὖθις καὶ
αὐθήμερον. The present ex. may be compared with the
frequent plays on names in the Tragedians, e.g. Pentheus and πένθος
Eur. Ba.
367.
τοὺς . . . ἐπιμελομένους
—i.e. the ἀγορανόμοι. Of Athens, Aristot. Ath. Pol. c. 51
says κληροῦνται δὲ καὶ ἀγορανόμοι . . .
τούτοις δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν νόμων
προστέτακται τῶν ὠνίων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι πάντων.
τῶν πωλουμένων
—provisions
for sale. Cf. Polyb. 1, 18 παῤείλετο
τὰς ἀγορὰς
καὶ τὴν τῶν ἀναγκαίων χορηγίαν. 14-15.
παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν
μεταστῆσαι
—Bekker, Arnold,
and edd. generally read μεταναστήσαντας ἐπὶ
τὴν θάλασσαν κομίσαι, with B; some alter μεταναστήσαντας to
μεταστήσαντας. Bloomfield rightly objects παρὰ with acens., it is true, ‘personam indicat—non rem—ad
quam ahquid movetur’; but ἵστασθαι,
τίθεσθαι,
ἕζεσθαι are certainly used with παρά, where previous motion is implied.
May not the words mean to move and place on
the shore?
αὐτοῖς
—it hardly seems necessary to
alter this to αὐτοῦ with the edd.,
following Portus. It may be ethic, applying to πάντας .
καὶ οἱ μὲν
—the style here becomes animated,
the quick succession of events being described in short co-ordinate
sentences joined by καί. In II. 21.3 there is a similar series with τε.
l 9.
τὰ ἀμφὶ
—ἀμφὶ
is not used freely by any prose author but Xen. It is not found in
inscriptions, except in metre, and in Aristoph. only when he
imitates tragedy. It is used twice by Thuc.
διὰ πολλοῦ θορύβου
—adverbial phrase, as in Aristoph. Vcsp. 929
διὰ κενῆς=ἄλλως
.
φυλασσόμενοι
—watching
each
other. This is of course not a pure reciprocal use of
the middle, the sense of reciprocity comes from ἀλλήλων.
διαμέλλοντας
—the change from
dat. to accus. does not affect the sense.
κόπῳ
ἁλίσκεσθαι
—seized, or
‘overcome with weariness.’ So Aesch. Eum.
67
ὕπνῳ
ἁλίσκεσθαι. Madvig's
ἀναλίσκεσθαι is unnecessary.
ἐκ παρακελεύσεως
—cf. II. 92.1
ἀπὸ ἑνὸς
κελεύσματος
ἐμβοήσαντες.
ἐμβόλων
—not from
ἐμβολή.
ἐπὶ πολὐ
—far into the
bows.
αὐτοῖς
—ethic, sc. τοῖς Συρακοσίοις.
περιπλέοντες
—attributive.
ταρσοὺς
—properly of the
bones in a bird's wing; hence used of any similar series, as the
banks of oars, as
here. It is often so used by Polyb. and later authors. The word is
frequently
referred to by the Atticists.
αὐτῶν
—τῶν
πλοίων.
ἐν τούτῳ
—while the Syr. preparations
were making.
παραγίγνονται
—Plutarch, in a well-known
passage, Nic. 21, describes the entrance of
the new force into the harbour θεατρικῶς καὶ
πρὸς ἔκπληξιν
πολεμίων. It is impossible to say why the Syr. did not
fight them at the harbour mouth. Perhaps some facts are omitted
here.
τρεῖς καὶ
ἑβδομήκοντα
μάλιστα
—the numbers
previously given bring the total to seventy-three exactly; but it is
unnecessary to omit
μάλιστα with B, since Thuc. allows for any possible
error in the previous data. Sixty-five sailed from Athens; fifteen
from Corcyra; two from Metapontum; one with Eurymedon; total
eighty-three; but ten had been given to Conon
ξὺν ταῖς
ξενικαῖς
—including,
the regular Attic meaning, except only in the old phrase σὺν (τοῖς
) θεοῖς σὺν is
very rare with persons and never implies a willing connection,
in Attic prose after Thuc.; he has ξὺν
fanly often with persons, and in cases implying will, viz c. 57; 2.58; III. 90. The latter use is common in
tragedy and Xen. In ordinary Attic σὺν
is the word for adding together the items of a sum total.
ξὺν (τοῖς)
ὅπλοις seems to be an old military phrase.
Ἕλληνας.
—Ἕλλην
can only be used as an adj. with
persons.
εἰ πέρας μηδὲν
ἔσται
—if there is to be
no end. Cf. Enr. Med. 931 εἰσῆλθέ μ’ οἶκτος εἰ
γενήσεται.
τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι
—defines πέρας, an end consisting
in deliverance, as in Pindar Pyth. IX. τερπνὰν
γάμου κραίνειν τελευταν, and in the Homeric τέλος
θανάτοιο, γάμοιο.
ὁρῶντες
—anacoluthon, as though the
preceding clause had been οἱ Σ. κατεπλάγησαν.
Cf. II. 53
νόμος
οὐδεὶς ἀπεῖργε,
τὸ μεν κρίνοντες, for ὑπ’
οὐδενὸς νόμου ἀπείργοντο Such a slight irregularity is not
uncommon in tragedy, as Eur.
Hec. 971
αἰδὡς μ’ ἐχει . . .
τυγχάνουσα. Plato Phaedo 81A
ὑπάρχει αὐτῇ
εύδαίμονι εἶναι . . . διάγουσα 14-5.
διὰ τὴν Δ. τειχιζομένην
—see on c. 28.4,
ἴσον καὶ παραπλήσιον
—cf. c. 78
τοιαῦτά τε καὶ
παραπλήσια .
πανταχόσε
—i.e. in whatever direction it
was exerted, whether in Attica itself or outside it. So πανταχόθεν in II.
53.3 means from whatever source it was obtained.
πολλὴν φαινομένην
—the same omission of
the partic, as in c. 21.3; 27.1
al. 19
ὡς ἐκ κακῶν ῥώμη
—i.e. as compared with their
troubles, it was positive ῥώμη;
cf. c. 76
ὡς ἐκ
τῶν ὑπαρχόντων
ἑθάρσυνε. ἐκ here describes the source of the ῥώμη,
ὡς is ‘considering that.’
οὐχ οἷόν τε εἶναι
—prob. Thuc. meant to say ‘it was impossible for him to delay
without experiencing’; this would require either οὐχ οἶόν τε εἶναι διατρίβειν μέν, παθεῖν δὲ
μή, or οὐχ οἶόν τε εἶναι
διατρίβοντα μὴ οὐ
παθεῖν. But the words as they stand mean it is
impossible to
delay
and to suffer, and this, after all, is more mcisive than
‘it is impossible to delay, and then not to suffer.’
φοβερός
—with
ἀφικόμενος. The act, sense of
φοβερός, causing terror, is the commoner.
The passive meaning timid occurs in II. 3.4; IV.
128.4; Soph. OT 153
φοβερὰν φρένα δείματι πάλλων.
αὐτοὺς
—object of
ὠφελεῖν, the subject of which is τὸ
μεταπέμψαι.
ταῦτα
—there is a similar parenthesis
followed by ταῦτα δὲ πάντα σκοπῶν
in Andoc. I. 58 fol.
οὖν
—resumes after the long parenthesis,
just as igitur, sed, autem are commonly used,
e.g. Cic. pro Mur. 50 meministis
enim, cum
illius
nefarii gladiatoris voces percrebruissent . . . tum igitur, his
rebus auditis
meministis.
τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μάλιστα
δεινότατος
—this is labelled as
an instance of the double superl., as in Eur. Med.
ὦ
μέγιστον ἐχθίστη γύναι, but Classen rightly takes
μάλιστα closely with τῇ
πρώτη? ἡμέρᾳ, for ‘especially on the first day’; but,
if he understood the passage, he did not make it clear. Why are
there three superlatives, πρώτη?, μάλιστα,
δεινότατος? Thuc. surely means that D. saw after his
arrival that the nearer the day of his arrival was the greater was
the awe he inspired. Hence trans. ‘realising that at present, while
his arrival was quite recent, he filled the enemy with awe.’
μάλιστα
—serves to bring the two
superlatives, πρώτῃ and δεινότατος, into relation. The whole is
an example of his love of elaborate, composite, and co-ordinate
expressions instead of subordinate clauses. For the use of
superlatives in such expressions, cf. II.
11.1
ἐπὶ πόλιν δυνατωτάτην νῦν
ἐρχόμεθα, καὶ αὐτοὶ
πλεῖστοι καὶ ἄριστοι στρατεύοντες, and perhaps the
constant use of μάλἰστα in
‘proportions,’ as in II.
47.4
μάλιστα ἔθνη?σκον ὅσῳ καὶ
μἀλιστα προσῇσαν .
ὅτι τάχος
—found also in Herod. 9.33, and equivalent to ὡς
τάχος=ὡς τάχιστα.
αὖθις
—then.
ὑπομεῖναι
—often contrasted with φεύγειν, either of soldiers or
litigants who stand a trial; sometimes it is joined with καρτερεῖν. It generally implies danger.
ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ πείρᾳ
—a graphic
expression for setting to work with a will.
οἱ
—the only case of the sing. of this
pron. at all frequent in prose. Even this is usually avoided by the
Orators.
ξυντομωτάτην κ.τ.λ.
—he
thought that (therein) lay the means of finishing the war most
quickly. (Classen rightly objects to inserting ταύτην after
ξυντομωτάτην with Madvig. It is perfeetly natural to
supply τὸ ἐπιθέσθαι τῆ? πείρᾳ with ἡγεῖτο.)
l 46
ἢ ἀπάξειν
—the suppression of the
alternative to κατορθώσας is a
fine effeet.
τρίψεσθαι
—passive.
ἐπεκράτουν
—
had the upper hand.
Freeman
.
οὐδὲ γὰρ καθ’ ἕτερα
=κατ’
οὐδέτερα.
ὅτι μὴ
—except.
μηχαναῖς
—Freeman says ‘it is strange
that we have heard so little of engines of this kind during the
whole war’ in Sicily. ‘They have not been mentioned before exeept
when Nicias used them as materials for a fire’ (VI. 101).
παρατειχίσματος
—N. in his letter had
said that it was necessary to capture the ἐγκάρσιον
τεῖχος πολλῇ στρατιᾷ ἐπελθών. The first attaek was made on
the south side.
ξυνάρχοντας
—Eurymedon,
Menander, Euthydemus.
ὡς ἐπενόει, καὶ
—καὶ
marks the carrying out of the plan that had been formed. In this
idiom the rel. sense of ὡς,
as, is hardly distinguishable from the temporal.
τὴν ἐπιχείρησιν
—
they were to strive to win their way on the north side by
the path by which
he (Nicias) had first made a lodgment for the invaders on
the hill of Syraeuse.
Freeman
.
ἀδύνατα
—the plur. marks the
details of a complex aetion.
ἡμερῶν
—gen. of measure, as
constantly in expressions of magnitude.
τοξευμάτων
—we expect rather a mention of
some engine used in the destruction of walls, and it is just
possible that τόξευμα here denotes
a machine of some kind. The proposals are
μοχλευμάτων Madvig, λαξευμάτων
Meineke, τειχομάχων Widmann. 15
ἢν κρατῶσι
—the pres. is used because κρατεῖν = to be master,
like νικῶ. Otherwise the aor.
would be necessary.
ἀπὸ πρώτου ὕπνου
—concubia
nocte; cf. περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον
II. 2.1; ἀπὸ
τρίτης
ὡρας Aets XXIII. 23. When
the art, is omitted with expressions of time, a preposition is
usually present, except with νυκτός, ἡμέρας
.
τὴν πεζὴν
—i.e. the foot at large who
were able to take part. Some were left to guard the works. (The true
reading πεζὴν eomes from Plut.
Nic.
21.)
ἐν τοῖς τείχεσιν
—it has been generally
assumed that, since the completion of the Syr. eross - wall, the A.
had abandoned the κύκλος
altogether, and held only the low ground at the
south; but there is no evidence for this, and probably Freeman is
right in assuming that N. still guarded the Fort.
ὑπελείπετο
—Classen well says
that the imperf. refers to his task of guarding the lines.
ῃπερ καὶ ἡ προτέρα
—referring
to the ascent of the A. in the spring of 414.
τὸ τείχισμα
—i.e. a fort on
Euryelus, built by Gylippus and forming the western extremity of his
cross-wall.
προτειχίσμασιν
—defensive
‘outworks’ on the north side of the cross-wall.
τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις
—a chosen
band of hoplites now under the command of Hermociates. They had been
appointed to
keep a look-out on Epipolae in 414.
ἀμυνομένους
—accus. because it is object
of ἔτρεψαν only. Contrast c. 53.2
προσπεσόντες
τοῖς πρώτοις
τρέπουσι.
τοῦ περαίνεσθαι
—that
by
means of the present impulse they might not be slow in the
execution of the
purpose
for which they had come. The infin. is passive and
depends on βραδεῖς γένωνται=ὑστερήσωσι .
ἄλλοι δὲ
—i.e. others than
Demosth. and his division.
ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης
—temporal, ‘in the first
instance.’ If τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς
π. παρατείχισμα be retained with the MSS., the meaning
is ‘the original cross-wall’; but there seems to be no reason why
the cross-wall should be so qualified. There is no subsequently
built wall with which it is contrasted.
οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι
—
while the invaders were still engaged on their attempt on
the wall (ἥ?ρουν . . . καὶ . . . ἀπέσυρον),
the garrisons of the other forts came forth to attack them.
Freeman
.
διὰ παντὸς τοῦ μήπω
μεμαχημένου
—those parts
of the army which had
not yet come
into action; neut. collective, as often.
διελθεῖν
—force their
way
through. ‘They feared,’ says Freeman, ‘lest, if they
relaxed for a moment, the whole force of the defenders should turn
and come together against them.’
οἱ Βοιωτοὶ
—i.e. the Thespians who in a
single ship had met the Syracusan fleet at Locri (c. 25.3). The majority of the three hundred
Bocotians referred to in c. 19.3 had
not yet reached Syr. See c. 50.1.
ἣν
—with reference to
which,
accus. de quo.
πυθέσθαι
—referring to his
own investigations in Sicily.
οὐδ’ ἀφ’ ἑτέρων
—cf. c.
42.6.
ἕκαστα
—the details.
ἕκαστος is as usual in the subordinate
clause, and so is nom., though it is in apposition to ἥν.
ξυνηνέχθη
=ξυνέβη.
The word is lonic in this meaning. Cf.
ξυμφορά. The use is found in Herod., Thuc., and late
authors like Lucian, Appian.
σαφέστερα μέν
—sc. ἐστὶν ἕκαστα.
οἶδεν
—sense requires the sing. here,
because οἰ παραγενόμενοι are
considered separately; but when the individuals all act alike, the
verb with ἕκαστος is in plur.
ἔν γε τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ
—i.e. as contrasted with other
wars; whereas ὁ πόλεμος
ὅδε implies no antithesis.
πῶς ἄν τις
—another question comes in 67, 2.
The question is one of the σχήματα
διανοίας—figures of thought—like irony, oxymoron. They
are not common in early prose; far less so than the σχήματα
λέξεως—figures of speech—like antithesis,
paronomasia—which themselves become commoner later.
ἑώρων . . . οὕτως . . . ὡς
. . εἰκὸς τὴν
μὲν ὄψιν . . . προορᾶν, τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν . . .
ἀπιστεῖσθαι
—though we have no such
idiom, yet in Greek there is certainly not an ellipse of ὸρᾶν after
εἰκός, as the edd. say. In the case of correlatives, the
explanation which we put in earlier is often deferred to the
relative clause. So here the contrast between ὄψιν and γνῶσιν
is deferred to the ὡς clause.
Traus. ‘as was natural for them to see in the moonlight, they saw
the outline of a figure in front without being able to distinguish
whether it was that of a friend.’ This idiom is very common with τοσοῦτον .
. . ὅσον, and is often misunderstood. (Cf. v. 95
οὐ τοσοῦτον
ἡμᾶς βλάπτει ἡ ἔχθρα ὑμῶν ὅσον ἡ φιλία
μὲν ἀσθενείας, τὸ δὲ μῖσος δυνάμεως παράδειγμα τοῖς ἀρχομένοις
δηλούμενον, where a reference to ἡ
φιλία is at first sight expected in the τοσοῦτον clause. The idiom with οὐχ
ὥσπερ is similar, as Aristoph.
Eq. 784
οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ῥαψάμενός σοι
τουτὶ
φέρω=‘he does bring you this as I do.’)
ὄψιν
—outline. Cf. Plat. Rep. 376B
ὄψιν
φίλην καὶ ἐχθρὰν διακρίνει. 12-3.
τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν τοῦ
οἰκείου
ἀπιστεῖσθαι
—lit. that
their recognition of
friends should
be distrusted
τοῦ οἰκείου
is neut. collective, as in c. 43.7.
Classen takes it to mean what
was
peculiar in contrast to τοῦ
σώματος.
τῇ πρώτῃ ἐφόδῳ
—with
their first impulse.
πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ
χωρῆσαι
—which division
they should join
χρὴ after
rel. words is very common; e.g. II. 4
ᾗ χρὴ σωθῆναι.
τὰ πρόσθεν
—those in
front
had become completely disorganised and were difficult to
distinguish. Cf. c. 14.2
χαλεπαὶ ἄρξαι .
κραυγῇ . . . χρώμενοι
—so c. 71.5 and II. 4.2.
There are κεκραγμός, κέκραγμα and κραυγή in Attic.
οἵ τε Ἀθηναῖοι
—answers οἵ τε γὰρ Σ. above.
πᾶν τὸ ἐξ ἐναντίας
—all
who came towards them. For the neut. collective with
adverb cf II. 45.1
τὸ μὴ ἐκποδὼν . . .
τετίμηται.
τῶν ἤδη πάλιν
φευγόντων
—belonging to
those who were already
in
flight.
αὐτὸ
=τὸ
ξύνθημα.
ἐκείνων
—applying to the enemy, as often.
Both ἐκεῖνος and αὐτὸς here and again in l. 38 are used
of the same people. This is very common.
ἐντύχοιεν
—sc. οἱ
Ἀθηναῖοι;
διέφευγον
—sc. οί
πολέμιοι.
ὑποκρίνοιντο
—answer; only
here in Thuc. It is Ionic; common in Herod.: Aristoph.
Acharn. 401, and late authors.
φόβον παρεῖχε
—sc
αὐτὸ, i.e. τὸ παιανίζειν
.
οἵ τε πολέμιοι
—what is to be
supplied?
φίλοι τε φίλοις
—polyptoton.
κατὰ . . . κρημνῶν
—ῥίπτειν
ἀπὸ is found only in late Greek 52
πάλιν καταβάσεως
—cf. c. 62
τὴν πάλιν
ἀνάκρουσιν.
τὸ ὁμαλὸν
—
the flat ground between the hill and the bay of Trôgilos.
The men
of the first armament, who had learned the he of the land on
both sides of the
hill, knew the roads, and contrived to make their way round
to the A. quarters.
Freeman
. They
had ascended Epipolae in 414.
διεφύγγανον
—The form φυγγάνω is occasionally found even in
the Orators.
πρός τε
—
with reference to.
Freeman
well
says that we must remember the old εὐτυχία
of Nicias. This remembrance it was which increased the vexation of
the troops.
ἀρρωστίαν
—medical term. Here in moral
sense, as in III. 15.2.
ἀχθομένους
—two reasons are given: (1) νόσῳ ἐπιέζοντο, (2) τὰ ἄλλα ἀνέλπιστα . . . ἐφαίνετο.
νόσῳ
—esp. those encamped
between the double walls below the cliff.
κατ’ ἀμφότερα
—for two
reasons, which are then given, viz. (1) the season, (2)
the place.
οὔσης . . . χαλεπὸν ἦν
—see on c. 13.2. 10
χαλεπὸν
—unhealthy, like βαρυς, gravis.
The unhealthiness of the marshy ground made it difficult to lay
siege to Syracuse by land. The Romans found this out in 212, Livy 24.26
tempore
autumni et locis natura gravibus, multo tamen magis extra
urbem quam in urbe, intoleranda vis aestus omnium ferme corpora
movit.
ἀνέλπιστα
—the pessimism that
usually accompanies bad health.
ἐς τὰς Ἐ. διεκινδύνευσεν
—the edd. compare III. 36.2
ἐς
Ἰωνίαν παρακινδυνεῦσαι.
τοῦ
στρατεύματος
—partitive
after ναυσί: ‘so long as it was
possible to prevail at least with that part of the fleet that had
come to reinforce them.’
l. 20
ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ
—at Decelea.
ἢ Συρακοσίους
—the preposition omitted in
the second clause after a comparative. Cf. V.
111
αἰσχύνην αἰσχίω μετ’ ἀνοίας ἢ
τύχης
προσλαβεῖν.
οὓς . . . ῥάδιον εἶναι
—cf. I.
91.5
ὅσα μετ’ ἐκείνων
βουλεύεσθαι; II. 13.5
οἷς
χρήσεσθαι, and 102 λέγεται . .
. ὄτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι. This attraction of short rel. clauses in Oratio Obliqua into infin. is less rare in
Greek than in Lat. (qui=et is is different).
Thuc. has nine instances. Cf. Roby, II. § 1677.
εἰκὸς εἶναι
—decere.
ἐνόμιζε μὲν
—Freeman says rightly, ‘They
were, he allowed, in evil case; but it would not do openly to
proclaim the fact.’ In his speech in the council N did not disguise
his opinion. Hence in ἐνόμιζε μὲν . . . τῷ
δὲ λόγῳ the antithesis is not so much between what he
thought and what he said, as between what he both thought and
admitted in the council and the impression which he wished his words
to produce outside the council. His admission was to be kept secret.
πόνηρα
—here bears the sense calamitous, dangerous, like our word
evil, as in the phrase in evil case.
Bloomfield. See not. crit., for the accent.
τῷ δὲ λόγῳ
—by his
speech, with ἀποδεικνύναι.
It was not to be publicly known that he felt they were in evil case;
nor was a report to reach the enemy that they were openly voting for
a retreat.
ἐμφανῶς
—with
ψηφιζομένους. This seems to be merely a plea for secrecy
by Nieias. He urged that if they voted for retreat,
every one would know of it and so the enemy would hear about it.
μετὰ πολλῶν
—has been thought
to refer to a subsequent and larger council to be held, at which the
taxiarchs would
attend; but prob. N. only means that if they voted for retreat,
their vote would
accord with the opinion of many in command, and that the enemy would
hear that this
was so.
καταγγέλτους γίγνεσθαι
—cf. III. 30.1
ἐκπύστους
γενέσθαι,
γίγνομαι making a passive with verbal adjs.
λαθεῖν
—antithesis to ἐμφανῶς and = μὴ
φανεροὶ
γενέσθαι.
τοῦτο ποιοῦντες
—the edd. all say this
means άναχωροῦντες. But it should
be ψηφιζόμενοι τὴν άναχώρησιν. N.
urges that no formal vote may be now taken, because every one must
know of it. ‘Let us wait, and decide the matter in secret and
informally should retreat become necessary’ He is not at present
dealing with the question of retreating immediately, but is arguing
on the assumption that an immediate retreat is impossible. Cf. c. 50, ll. 30, 31.
ποιοῦντες
—
ἐβούλετο is here lost sight of, and the
Obliqua is used. Nicias is part of the subject, and so the nom.
is possible.
τὸ δέ τι
—Thuc. has told us why N. objected
to an open vote, and now proceeds to explain why N. thought an
immediate retreat unnecessary, and indeed impossible. This is shown
below by ἢν καρτερῶσι προσκαθήμενοι
as distinct from οὐδ’ ἐμφανῶς σφᾶς
ψηφιζομένους κ.τ.λ. above.
ἀφ’ ὧν
—judging from private (ἐπὶ πλέον ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι) information
that he received of them.
ἀφ’ ὧν . .
. αυτῶν= ἀπ’
ἐκείνων ἃ αὐτῶν, and αὐτῶν
is neut., referring to τὰ τῶν πολεμίων
.
ἐλπίδος τι
—cf. c.
69
λαμπ ρότητός τι.
χρημάτων γὰρ
—they
would
wear out the Syr. by want of supplies.
θαλασσοκρατούντων
—sc. σφῶν; the gen. abs. in spite of the
subject being the same as that of
ἐκτρυχώσειν. This has the effect of strongly emphasising
the participial clause and of contrasting the position of the A.
with that of the Syr. (Hw. here reads
θαλασσοκρατοῦντες; Stahl inserts
σφῶν, and it is not quite clear that any of the passages
where this construction occurs are parallel to this one.) The same
phenomenon appears in Latin; e.g. Livy
23.24.10
pontem fluminis
petentes, obsesso ante ab hostibus ponte.
ἦν γάρ τι
—cf. c. 4.2
.
τὰ πράγματα
ἐνδοῦναι
—place the
government in their hands.
ἐπεκηρυκεύετο
—the subject must be taken
from the paren thesis, just as the ohject is in III. 70.3
καί
(ἦν γὰρ
Πειθίας . . .) ὑπάγουσιν αὐτόν
.
οὐκ εἴα
—urged him
not.
ἃ ἐπιστάμενος
—sums up the motives that
prompted Nicias. Cf. I. 42
ὧν ἐνθυμηθέντες; VI.
60
ὧν ἐνθυμούμενοι.
τῷ μὲν ἔργῳ . . . τῷ δ’ ἐ. . . .
λόγῳ
—the antithesis occurs about
fifty times in
Thuc. ‘In reality he held back, inclining both ways and considering,
but in his
public speech at the time.’
ἐπ’ ἀμφότερα ἔχων
—on the analogy of ἔχειν with adverbs.
τῷ δ’ ἐμφανεῖ
—then follows the summary of
his official speech. As Thuc has such a clear knowledge of the
motives given above, we may assume that Nicias began by making
admissions which he did not wish to be taken as part of his ἐμφανὴς λόγος. (We could scarcely
suppose that Thuc., sympathising with N., merely
inferred his motives)
σφῶν
—in them; for the
constrn. Fr. Muller compares θαυμάζειν τί
τινος .
ὥστε
—introduces the epexegesis of ταῦτα; cf. II.
40.3
διαφερόντως γὰρ καὶ τόδε ἔχομεν
ὥστε τολμᾶν , namely that they should depart
without an order from them.
καὶ γὰρ οὐ τοὺς
αὐτοὺς
—we shall not,
he said, ‘then have the same body of persons both voting about
ourselves and making up their minds from seeing the facts with their
own eyes as we do instead of merely hearing them from the
faultfinding of others.’ For τῶν
αύτῶν cf. I. 22.3
οὐ
ταὐτὰ περὶ τῶν αύτῶν ἔλεγον, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἑκατέρων
τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης ἔχοι; III.
56.7.
ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ
—sc.
ὁρῶσιν. But the accus. might be used with ὥσπερ, corresponding with ὁρῶντας .
ἐξ ὧν ἄν τις
—they
will
let themselves be persuaded by the calumnies of a clever
speaker. With εὖ λέγων
διαβάλλειν cf. καλῶς
ἐπιτιμᾶν
III. 38.4; εὖ
διαβαλὼν
III. 42.2.
καὶ
—immo.
ὑπὸ χρημάτων
—been
bribed
to turn traitors and depart.
ἐπιστάμενος
—the timidity of
Nicias in this matter is in marked contrast with the outspoken
boldness of Pericles.
Thirlwall doubted whether N. really feared the A. so much as he
professed to do.
ἐπ’ αἰσχρᾷ τε αἰτίᾳ
—viz. on a γραφὴ προδοσίας, which might be brought
by any citizen even against a general by means of an impeachment (
εἰσαγγελία) in the Ecclesia. The penalties were very
severe, involving death, confiscation, and burial outside the state, ἀτιμία for the convict's descendants,
and the entry of the man's name on a black list. The case would be
tried before the Thesmothetae, who also superintended the εύθυναι—accounts—of retiring
στρατηγοί, and a Court of heliasts.
μᾶλλον ἢ κ.τ.λ.
—he
would
sooner run the risk, and die on his own account at the hands of
the enemy, if die
he
must.
ἰδίᾳ
—there is no need to suspect this
word with Kr. and Hw.; to die at the hands of the public
executioner is δημοσίᾳ ἀποθανεῖν;
N. desires to die otherwise. There is also abundant evidence that
difficulties arising at Athens out of the
στρατηγία were regarded as especially δημόσια.
ἔφη
—when long passages of Oratio Obliqua are attempted in Greek, the
verb of ‘saying’ is frequently repeatcd. The structure of this c. is
similar to II.
13.
ξενοτροφοῦντας
—these mercenaries were
partly Sicel, partly Arcadian. Mercenary service was traditional
among the Arcadians. It only became general in Greece after the Pel.
war. The Pel. employed many—probably 3000—in 426 against Demosthenes
in Aetolia, and Brasidas had 1000 in Thrace. Cf. c. 19.4.
ἐν περιπολίοις
—forts for the protection
of the open country, with home-garrisons, as distinct from στρατειαί. Cf. VI.
45 of the Syr., ἐς τὰ περιπόλια τὰ ἐν
τῇ χώρᾳ φρουρὰς
ἐσεκόμιζον.
ἔτι
—besides.
βόσκοντας
—when used of men, βόσκειν implies contempt or trouble.
Cf. Herod. VI. 39
βόσκων
ἐπικούρους. The participles belong to ἀπορεῖν and
ἀμηχανήσειν alike.
τὰ μὲν ἀπορεῖν
κ.τ.λ.
—were in
difficulties, and would
hereafter be at a
loss.
ἀπορεῖν refers to
want of money, ἀμηχανήσειν to the
diminution of their παρασκευὴ
which would result from this ἀπορία
.
ἔτι
—with the future is used
thus in threats and prophecies.
ἤν τε . . . ἐκλίπωσι
—contrast c. 13.1
εἰ
ἀφαιρήσομέν τι καὶ
βραχὺ τῆς τηρήσεως, and see on c. 8.1 for the difference in the protasis.
τῆς νῦν παρασκευῆς
—their
present forces, depending on
ὀτιοῦν. Of course the forces would fall off if the pay
were not forthcoming.
ἐπικουρικὰ
—mercenaries would serve for
anyone that hired them. But the Athenians served δῑ
ἀνάγκης, as men compellcd by law and duty.
τρίβειν
—remain; cf. c. 49.2.
καὶ μὴ χρήμασιν, ὧν
κ.τ.λ.
—and not to leave
defeated by the money
of an enemy
than whom they were far better off.
χρήμασιν, ὧν = χρήμασιν
ἐκείνων ὧν. Nicias has alluded in
χρήματα only to the financial straits of the enemy, and
adroitly says ‘are wc to let ourselves be beaten by an enemy who,
even if he is for the moment stronger, is yet so much poorer that he must lose if we remain?’ (Other edd. take χρήμασιν differently. Most reject
ὧν of B and either render ὡς
since, or alter it. Thuc does not use ὡς
since with indic. elsewhere.)
ὧν
—antecedent omitted. This cannot be
connected with νικηθέντας, as νικᾶν with gen. is exclusively
poetical.
πολὺ κρείσσους
—Herbst says that πολλῷ κρείσσους is always used by Thuc.
for to
be much better off, and that πολὺ
κρείσσους=νικᾶν. But
here νικᾶν is itself used in a
metaphorical sense, of being beaten by money.
And Nicias chooses words which will bear both senses, as they help
to disgnise the weakness of the A.
ἰσχυρίζετο
—spoke
confidently. 2
αἰσθόμενος . . . ὅτι
—a substantive clause
after αἰσθάνομαι is not very
common; cf. I. 50; II. 88.1; the partic. is far commoner.
ὥστε
—see on c.
48.3.
καὶ ἅμα
—the construction is again
changed from partic. to finite verb. Cf. c.
47.2 .
ταῖς γοῦν ναυσὶν
—in
the
fleet at least he retained his old confidence.
[κρατηθείς]
—it is not likely that Thuc.
said this of Nicias, who had taken no part in the night attack.
Nowhere else does he use κρατεῖν
except of a general actually leading his men. We should also require
parallels to ἐθάρσει
κρατηθείς for ‘he felt confident
though he had been defeated.’ As the passage is clearly
corrupt, we may safely omit the word. (Widmann reads (μᾶλλον) θαρσήσας ἣ πρότερον
κρατηθείς, and Sitzler (μᾶλλον)
θαρσῶν, ἢ
πρότερον ἐθάρσησε κρατηθείς.)
ἄνευ Ἀ. ψηφίσματος
—cf. ἄνευ Λακεδαιμονίων
I.
128; οὐ μετὰ τοῦ πλήθους
ὑμῶν
III. 66.
τρίβειν αὐτοῦ
—remain
in
Sicily.
Θάψον . . . ἢ . . . Κατάνην
—
there they would have the open sea and all the advantages
which the open
sea
gave to the A. tactics. There they would . . . maintain
themselves by harrying
the
territory of the enemy.
Freeman
.
οὐκ . . . ἀλλ’
—cf. Eur.
Ion 131
οὐ θνατοῖς ἀλλ’
ἀθανάτοις.
τὰ τῆς ἐμπειρίας χ
—the
advantages of skill will be theirs.
ἀναχωρήσεις κ τ.λ.
—chiasmus, ἀναχωρήσεις corresponding to καταίροντες,
ἐπίπλους to ὁρμώμενοι
.
καταίροντες
—sc. ἐς
βραχὺ καὶ περιγραπτόν.
μέλλειν
—cf. Eur.
Heraclid. 132
σὸν δὴ τὸ
φράζειν ἐστὶ μὴ μέλλειν τ’.
μέλλησις
—cf Aristoph. Av. 639
οὐχὶ
νυστάζειν ἔτι | ὥρα στιν ημῖν
οὐδὲ μελλονικιᾶν .
ἐνεγένετο
—cf. VIII.
9
διατριβῆς ἐγγιγνομένης
.
ὑπόνοια μή
—as though ὑπόνοια were
φόβος. Cf. III. 53
ὑποπτεύομεν μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ
ἀποβῆτε.
κατὰ χώραν ἔμενον
—a common phrase. (Stein on Herod. III. 135, Kock on Aristoph. Eq. 1354.)
Γύλιππος
—see c.
46.
ἡ τοῖς Σ. στάσις φιλία
—for the order cf. on c. 23.3. ‘The party favourable to the S.
had been expelled.’ Cf. Aesch.
PB 127
φιλία γὰρ ἅδε τάξις
; Choeph. 458 στάσις
δὲ πάγκοινος ἅδ’
ἐπιρροθεῖ.
τοὺς ἐκ τῆς Π
—see c.
19.3.
l 10.
ἀπενεχθέντες
—by had weather.
Εὐεσπερίταις
—afterwards one of five
towns called the Pentapolis of Cyrene. In 401 it was again attacked
by Libyans, and offered citizenship to any Greek who would come to
its aid. Many of the Messenians, expelled from Naupactus by the
Spartans, went there. Paus. IV. 26; Diod. 14.34.
δύο ἡ
—gen. of measure and epexegetic of ἐλάχιστον.
ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον
χωροῦντα
—improving.
χαλεπώτερον ἴσχοντα
—a substitute for χαλεπωτέρως ἔχοντα.
ὁμοίως
—as before.
ἀλλ’ ἢ
—except.
μὴ φανερῶς . . . ψηφίζεσθαι
—see on c. 48.1. No formal vote was to be passed.
προεῖπον ὡς ἐδύναντο
κ.τ.λ.
—they gave
notice as secretly as
possible to
all.
παρασκευάσασθαι
—to
prepare
(to depart) when the sign was given. The sentence would
be clearer if he had said ὡς ἐδύναντο
ἀδηλότατα παρασκευάσασθαι ἔκπλουν
ποιησομένους ὅταν τις ς.; but it is easy to supply
ἐκπλευσομένους from ἐκπλοῦν
after παρασκευάσασθαι. (The preliminary arrangements are not denoted by παρασκευάσασθαι but are implied clearly
enough in προεῖπον ἔκπλουν. So in VI. 65
προεῖπον
πανδημεὶ
πᾶσιν ἐξιέναι Συρακοσίοις. ἐπεὶ δὲ
ἑτοῖμα αὐτοῖς καὶ τὰ τῆς παρασκευῆς ἦν κ τ.λ.; there
too προεῖπον ἐξιέναι implies
preparation for the expedition. Here
παρασκευάσασθαι applies to such final arrangements as can
only be made when the final order is given. There is no need to
alter the aor. into the perf., as some of the edd. do.)
τις
—added to
σημήνῃ because the sign was to be given not by herald, but
secretly
ἡ σελήνη ἐκλείπει
—eclipses of sun or moon were
deemed ominous. Plnt. Nic. 23 says that even οὶ πολλοὶ knew in the time of Nicias
that eclipses of the sun were a natural phenomenon; but this is very
doubtful. What was known about them was due to the
teaching of Anaxagoras. Plut. Per. 35
; de superstit. c. 7
.
ἐτύγχανε . . . οὖσα
—Thuc. uses the imperf. of τυγχάνω with pres. or perf.; with aor.
only in VIII. 105. See on c. 4.3.
ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι
—took
it to heart.
ἦν . . . προσκείμενος
—the tense of εἰμὶ must precede the participle in
this periphrasis, as it is emphatic, representing a state of things
existing at the time referred to. Cf. II. 67
ἦν . . .
πολιορκοῦν; 2.80
ἦσαν .
. . ξυμπροθυμούμενοι.
τι καὶ ἄγαν κ τ.λ.
—cf Intr.
p. XXXV. Plutarch says that Stilbides had lately died.
οὐδ’ ἂν
διαβουλεύσασθαι
—he would
not even enter into
any further
discussion as to how he should move until . . .
πρὶν . . . μεῖναι
—here
πριν has the infin., though a negative precedes. This
happens when something positive is insisted on; as here the fact
that he would remain so long.
ἐξηγοῦντο
—technical word for
interpretation by priests. Cf. Andoc. I. 116
ἐξηγῇ Κηρύκων ὤν, οὐχ ὅσιον ὄν.
τρὶς ἐννέα
—Plutarch says
that the priests only required nine days, but Nicias insisted on
staying for a whole
revolution of the moon.
μελλήσασι
—refers to the delay that had
been rendered necessary by the eclipse, before they had decided how
long to remain. ὴ μονὴ on the
contrary refers to the definite stay of twenty-seven days. But they
had only stayed a few days when they were attacked. ‘And so the A.,
after delaying for this reason, had resolved to remain.’
Γύλιππος
—he had remained on
shore, where Demosthenes kept a look-out on him.
ἔξω τῶν σταυρωμάτων
—i.e. to the south-west
of their palisade;
they were chased to the muddy shore and the shallow
waters between it and
the
promontory of Daskôn.
Freeman
.
τῆς γῆς φιλίας οὔσης
—i.e.
that part of the land which lay south-west of the A. lines, and so
the very part on
to which the A. ships were being carried.
τὴν χηλὴν
—a mole running
along the coast between the shore and the marsh Lysimeleia.
οἱ Τυρσηνοί
—the Etruscans
were old enemies to Syracusan trade and naval power, and had
consequently sent aid
to Athens in the expedition.
ταύτῃ
—close up by the A.
lines where they reached the mole.
ἐπιβοηθήσαντες
καὶ
δείσαντες
—fearing
for their ships and coming
to their
aid. Thuc. often thus co-ordinates effect and cause,
placing the causal partic. second, as in VIII.
7.1
ἐπειγομένων
τῶν Χίων ἀποστεῖλαι τὰς ναῦς καὶ δεδιότων
μὴ οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι αἴσθωνται.
ξυνήγαγον κατὰ τὸ
ς.
—brought them within
the shelter of their
lines,
i e. within the stockade.
κληματίδων καὶ δᾳδὸς
—a collective sing. is
sometimes thus joined with a plur, as in II.
4.2
λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ. Cf.
Theognis 1360 κληματίνῳ πυρί.
ἀφεῖσαν
—see on c.
19.4
περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν
—περὶ
with dat. is rare in prose outside Thuc., who uses it often with
verbs of fearing.
ἀντεμηχανήσαντό
τε . . . καὶ
παύσαντες
—the
co-ordination of an act and its result by τε
. . . καὶ is poetical.
σβεστήρια κωλύματα
—this collocation is
awkward, but Pollux has σβεστηρίοις
κωλύμασιν
ἐχρῶντο Hw. first thought of σβεστήρια
καὶ
κω., but rightly rejected it.
παύσαντες . . . τὸ μὴ
προσελθεῖν
—see on c. 33.3 .
λαμπρᾶς
— cf. II.
7.1
λελυμένων λαμπρῶς τῶν
σπονδῶν.
καὶ
—the A. army having been
defeated already in the nightattack.
μὲν
—there is no
δὲ to answer this, but the antithesis is obvious.
ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας
—??f. on c. 2.4 6
ὁ παράλογος
—see Iutr. p. xxxiii. The A.
were as much astonished at their own failure as the rest of Greece
had been at their undertaking the expedition. Cf. c. 28.3 .
τῆς στρατείας ὁ
μ.
—regret about the
expedition.
ὁμοιοτρόποις
—a remarkable tribute to the
advanced state of institutions in the Greek cities of Sicily when we
remember Pericles' panegyric of Athenian
τρόποι.
ναῦς
—this consideration had
rendered the acquisition of influence in Sicily very important at
the beginning of
the Pel. war. Sparta made great efforts to obtain a large fleet
there.
ἵππους
—the Sicilian horses
were of proverbial excellence.
μεγέθη
—the plur. is often found, though
not in Thuc. elsewhere; cf. Herod. II. 10
; VII. 103.
ἐκ πολιτείας . . .
μεταβολῆς
—but Alcibiades had urged
before the expedition that the cities of Sicily, being populated by
motley crowds, ῥᾳδίας
ἔχουσι τῶν πολιτειῶν τὰς μεταβολάς, VI.
17.2. It was the invasion that united the various classes
sufficiently to prevent revolutions.
τι
—Classen makes this adverbial; Stahl
makes it object of ἐπενεγκεῖν.
Then Classen makes τὸ διάφορον
object of ἐπενεγκεῖν; whereas
Stahl places comma after μεταβολῆς
and makes τὸ δ. object of προσήγοντο. Translate, with Classen's
construction, ‘seeing that of the cities which they had attacked
these were the only ones then having institutions similar to their
own, governed by democracy and possessing fleets and horses and
importance, and as they were unable either through a
change in their constitution in any respect, or by a greatly
superior force to make them feel the difference, by which they might
have gained power over them, and as they failed oftener than they
succeeded, they had before this been in difficulties, and now that
they had been defeated by sea as well—which would never have
occurred to them—they were in much greater despair.’
τὸ διάφορον
— variously explained as
‘internal discord’ (Heilmann), ‘change of attitude’ (Classen), ‘the
opposite party’ (Stahl). But the context is decidedly in favour of
‘the difference between the two sides,’ which in this case the A.
had no means of bringing home to the enemy, either by causing a
revolution in favour of demoeracy or by coercing them with superior
force. For the sense cf. c. 75.7. (If τὸ διάφορον is separated from
ἐπενεγκεῖν with Stahl, ἐπενεγκεῖν
τι becomes decidedly obscure, nor is its bearing on ἠπόρουν clear. One of the reasons of
the ἀπορία was that the A found
they could not make the cities see a difference — or balance — in
favour of Athens.)
αὐτοῖς
—after
ἐπενεγκεῖν, though πόλεσι
precedes, the inhabitants being substituted for the cities. Stahl
takes it with τὸ διάφορον.
ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν
—sc. τὰς
πόλεις. Cf the advice of Nicias at the beginning of the
expedition τῶν ἄλλων τινα πόλεων
προσαγαγέσθαι , VI. 47.
(Freeman says ‘the reference must be mainly or wholly to Syracuse.’
There is no ground for this assumption)
ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῷ κ
—just as ἐκ
πολιτείας μεταβολῆς refers to something which the A. had not been able to do, so ἐκ π.
πολλῷ κ. refers to something which they had not possessed for, besides being under
democracies, the cities had ‘fleets and horses and greatness’ Hence δημοκρατουμέναις corresponds with ἐκ πολιτείας
μεταβολῆς, and καὶ ναῦς
etc. with ἐκ π πολλῷ κρείσσονος.
Thuc. is referring to the whole course of the
expedition from the start For the facts alluded to, compare (a) what Hermocrates is made to say before the
A. landed—οὐ πλείους τῶν ἐνοικούντων καὶ
ἀστυγειτόνων ἔρχονται, πάντα γὰρ ὑπὸ δέους ξυνίσταται, VI
33, (b) what Athenagoras is made to say—ἡγοῦμαι
. . . τὴν ἠμετέραν πόλιν αὐτην τῆς νῦν στρατιᾶς . .
καὶ εἰ δὶς τοσαύτη ἔλθοι, πολὺ κρείσσω εἶναι, VI.
37, (c) what Thuc. says above in
c. 28 of the relative size of Syracuse
and Athens.
σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ πλείω
—cf. II. 65.12
σφαλέντες
ἐν Σικελίᾳ
ἄλλῃ παρασκευῇ. He is thinking of the turn which the
siege had taken. Cf. I.
69.5.
τά τε πρὸ αὐτῶν
—i.e. before the sea-fight,—the
sense of
αὐτὰ being
as often supplied from the context. (The brevity of this passage
renders it very obscure. The sense of
κρείσσονος and πλείω is,
I believe, uncertain.
κρείσσονος
might mean larger
than that
brought by Demosthenes and
Eurymedon; πλείω
might imply ‘since the arrival of Demosth.
and Eur.’ The above explanation is only offered as an approximation
to the probable meaning.)
μᾶλλον
—sc.
ἠπόρουν.
ἀδεῶς
—even past the A.
station. 3
διενοοῦντο κλῄσειν
—were
resolved that they would close.
περὶ τοῦ . . . σωθῆναι . .
. τὴν
ἐπιμέλειαν
—like ἀγών,
κίνδυνος
περὶ with noun.
ἐκείνους
—again notice this use of ἐκεῖνος. 9
ἀπό τε τῶν παρόντων
—in
consequence of the present circumstances.
καλὸν σφίσιν κ.τ.λ.
—the
success would appear to the Greeks glorious to them.
There is a metaphor here from the Olympic games. ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας is used with φανεῖσθαι just as it is with λέγειν when large bodies are addressed.
The Greeks are here spectators of the contest.
ἐλευθεροῦσθαι
—the pres. is
here used in a vivid sense for the future.
οὐ γὰρ ἔτι
—this did not prove to be the case
at once. Cf. II. 65.12
ὅμως δέκα ἔτη ἀντεῖχον.
καὶ αὐτοὶ
—co-ordinate with τούς τε γὰρ
αὐτῶν
—neut., used as in c. 55.2
καὶ ἦν δὲ
—cf. II. 36
καὶ πρέπον δὲ ἅμα In this idiom δὲ is the connecting particle, while καὶ emphasises the statement. This is a
remark added by Thuc. on his own account.
οὐχὶ Ἀθηναίων
—it was
not the A. only that they were going to conquer, but many of
their allies as well,
and not by themselves either, but in company with those who had
come to their
aid—having taken the lead with . . . and having put forward
their city in
the struggle to take the post of danger and having made a great
advance with the
fleet. 23
περιεγίγνοντο
—the imperf. of γίγνομαι and its compounds is
frequently thus used when something about to happen is anticipated.
So with δίδωμι and compounds. Cf.
Andoc. I. φονεὺς
ἐγιγνόμην τοῦ πατρός=‘I was near becoming my father's
murderer.’
τῶν ἄλλων πολλῶν
ξυμμάχων
—they would be
defeating as well their own
enemies in Sicily.
οὐδ’ αὐτοὶ αὖ μόνοι
—Kruger objects that it would
detract from the glory of Syr. to say that they won with the help of others; but Thuc. here states with exactness the
nature of the success, and is not concerned either to enhance or to
detract from it. Their distinction was (a) to
have fought side by side with Corinth and Sparta, (
b) that Syr. had borne the brunt of the struggle, (c) that thus it had been the chief instrument
in destroying the A. empire.
It was Syracuse, that day the equal yoke-fellow of Cor.
and of Sparta,
going
forth at the head of a crowd of allies, but with Syr.
herself the centre and
object of the strife, that was called on to strike the blow.
Freeman
.
ἐμπαρασχόντες
—i.e. παρασχόντες ἐν τῷ ἀγῶνι. ἐν in
compounds has often an adverbial force; as in II.
44.1
ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι=εὐδαιμονῆσαι
ἐν τῷ βίῳ.
προκινδυνεῦσαί τε
—the τε, as Herbst rightly says, joins
προκόψαντες with ἐμπαρασχόντες,
and προκινδυνεῦσαι is in this
order because it is an integral part of the phrase.
τοῦ ναυτικοῦ . . .
προκόψαντες
— having opened the way
for the navy, by shewing that the A were not invincible by sea Cf.
Eur Hippol. 23, Xen
Hipparch. 6, 5.
ἐπὶ
—to, whether as
friends or as enemies.
<πολεμοῦντος
>—without
some such word we should have to supply
ξυνελθόντος, but the ellipse is very awkward, and, as Stahl
says, the sense ad
urbem convenire is absurd.
ἐπὶ Σ. καὶ περὶ Σ.
—belongs to
ἐπολέμησαν, which is ingressive, =‘went to war.’
ἐπὶ Συρακούσαις
—Holden retains the MSS. ἐπὶ Συρακούσας, and takes it with ἐλθόντες; but (1) the order is against
this; (2) ἐπὶ Συρακούσας then
impedes the progress of the sentence, since ἐπὶ
Σικελίαν τε καὶ περὶ Σ. is supplied with ἐλθόντες (Herbst agrees with Holden;
and he thinks that the form of the sentence is improved).
οὐ κατὰ δίκην κ.τ
λ.
—joining one another not so
much from a
sense of right .
. ., but rather as circumstances united the several states
either through interest
or on compulsion.
τι μᾶλλον
—often used together, or in the
form μᾶλλόν τι. It is stronger
than μᾶλλον. μᾶλλον . . . ἀλλὰ for μᾶλλον . . ἢ, only found after a neg., gives greater emphasis to the second
elause. 6
κατὰ ξυγγένειαν
—it will be
seen in § 2 fol. that very few of the allies of either side took
their side in the
war from this motive.
μετ’ ἀλλήλων στάντες
—the usual construction, but ἵστασθαι πρός τινα is also fonnd.
ὡς ἕκαστοι . . . ἔσχον
—cf c. 2.1
ὡς εἶχον τάχους.
τῆς ξυντυχίας
— ‘circumstances’ which
result in decisive action. Here these circumstances are themselves
the result of interest or necessity Hence the
‘circumstances’ are feelings that prompt the different states to
unite. Cf. I. 33.3. (No doubt this is
what Classen meant by rendering ὡς τῆς ξ.
ἔσχον
as they came mto a closer
relationship.)
Ἀθηναῖοι μὲν κ.τ λ.
—chiasmus
again.
αὐτοῖς
—after τῇ
αὐτῇ.
ἔτι
—with
νομίμοις.
Λήμνιοι
—the allies of Athens are
enumerated thus: (1) Colonists § 2; (2) Euboea § 4; (3) Cylades § 4;
(4) Asia Minor §§ 4-6; (5) the islands off north-west coast of
Greece § 7; (6) Peloponnesians and
μισθοφόροι §§ 8-10; (7) allies in Italy and Sicily § 11.
Lemnos and Imbros were secured for Athenian cleruchs by Miltiades,
and these two with Scyros were regarded as very peculiarly the
possessions of the A. in the north.
οἳ τότε Αἴγιναν εἶχον
—i.e.
the A. cleruchs placed there in 431 B.C., when the Aeginetans were
expelled by A.,
and settled by Sparta in Thyrea, the border-land between Argolis and
Laconia.
Ἑστιαιῆς
—taken by A. for
cleruchs after the reduction of Euboea by Pericles in 445.
ἄποικοι
—i.e. the
κληροῦχοι had by now quite supplanted the older population
and taken its name, and were regarded as owners, like the possessores.
ξυνεστράτευσαν
—ingressive,
‘took the field with them.’
οἱ μὲν ὑπήκοοι
—Stahl notes that there are
two classes of these perpetual and subject allies, viz. (1) ὑπήκοοι καὶ φόρου ὑποτελεῖς, (2) ὑπἡκοοι
οἱ ναυτικὸν παρεχόμενοι or
αὐτόνομοι, enjoying their own constitution; viz. Methymna,
Chios. These are both distinct from οἱ απὸ
ξυμμαχίας
αὐτόνομοι, like Corcyra, Zacynthus, Cephallenia.
ὑπηκόων καὶ φόρου
ὑ.
—subdivided into those
from (1) Euboea, (2) νῆσοι = the
Cyclades, (3) Ionia. In the latter Chios is included, but Thuc. adds
an explanation that it was not
ὑποτελής.
Ἐρετριῆς καὶ Χαλκιδῆς
—the
two most important towns of Euboea; in early times they were rivals.
Chalcis is
still the capital of the island, but Eretria is now quite
insignificant.
νήσων
—often used in a restricted sense
for the Cyclades. Cf. I. 13.6; III. 104.2.
Κεῖοι
— cf. Herod.
VIII. 46
Κήιοι ἔθνος ἐὸν
Ἰωνικὸν ἀπὸ Ἀθηνέων.
τούτων
—asyndeton with demonstr., as Herod. 9.33 with
τότε.
τὸ πλεῖστον . . . πάντες
— ‘all being Ionians in the
main.’ There were some Dryopians among the Styrians, and in the
Cyclades there were Carians.
ἀπ’ Ἀθηναίων
— there was an unfounded
tradition that Chalcis and Eretria were founded by Athens. As for
Ionia and the Cyclades, cf. I. 12
Ἴωνας
μὲν Ἀθηναῖοι καὶ νησιωτῶν τοὺς τολλοὺς
ᾤκισαν.
Καρυστίων
— Herod. says that
the Dryopians had originally lived in Doris and had been driven out
through the
early migrations.
ὅμως
— with Ἴωνές
γε. Though they served under obligation, yet it was
natural for them to be on the side of A.
Μηθυμναῖοι
—the only Lesbians
who retained their autonomy after the revolt of 428. The Aeolians
colonised six
places in Lesbos.
Αἴνιοι
— at the mouth of the
Hebrus, colonised by Aeolians from Mytilene.
Βοιωτοῖς
— the Aeolian
colonisation proceeded from Thessaly and Boeotia.
καὶ ἄντικρυς
—though
outright. The Plataeans meant are those who escaped at
the time of the siege. Athens had given Scione to them for a home.
Ῥόδιοι
— Rhodes was a
tripolis, and very early acquired great wealth by its trade, and
remained rich until
debased by Rome.
Κυθήριοι
—seized by Nicias in
424. Athens had retained Cythera contrary to the terms of his peace.
τῶν περὶ Πελοπόννησον
—regular expression for
the N. W. islands. Cf. VI. 85
νησιώτας ὄντας . . . ἐν χωρίοις ἐπικαίροις περὶ
τὴν
Π.; Isocr. 15. 108
τίς
οὐκ οἶδε Κόρκυραν ἐν ἐπικαιροτάτῳ καὶ κάλλιστα
κειμένην τῶν περὶ Π.;
Κεφ. μὲν . . . αὐτ. μέν, κατὰ δὲ .
. . Κερ.
δὲ
— the extremes and the means
are contrasted, as usually with this double use of μὲν . . . δέ. For the islands see on c. 31.2
κατὰ δὲ τὸ ν.
—as
islanders.
μᾶλλον
—the edd. supply ἢ οἱ ἠπειρῶται, following Aemilius
Poitus. It is not easy to detect hereabouts any antithesis between
the condition of the islanders and mainlanders. Thuc. means μᾶλλον ἢ ἑκόντες. Freeman says ‘the
practical effect of a formally equal alliance between a stronger and
a weaker power is well set forth.’ (My explanation of μᾶλλον is strongly supported by οὐχ
ἧσσον sc. ἢ ἀνάγκῃ
below)
Κορίνθιοι σαφῶς
— ‘actually
Corinthians.’ In 492 Corcyra had helped Syracuse against Hippocrates
of Gela, and
once again helped her in the days of Timoleon.
ξυγγενεῖς
—Corinth being the
mother-city of both.
ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρεπουυ—ς
—the obligation under which
Corcyra stood to Athens made a πρόφασις
εὐπρεπὴς for sinking her obligation to respect her
mother-city.
εἵποντο
—the simple verb
following the compound of l. 44 is idiomatic.
l. 49,
οἱ Μεσσήνιοι νῦν κ.
—i e. not the
inhabitants of Messenia or of Messana in Sicily, but οἱ ἐκ Ν. καὶ ἐκ Π., those whom
we in
our day call Messenians. They were descended mostly from οἱ παλαιοὶ Μεσσήνιοι
I. 101 f. (Stahl says that Thuc. alludes
to the fact that some of them wcrc really helots; but it is more
likely that he alludes to their change of home at the end of the
third Messenian war and in 425 B.C.)
νῦν
—means the time at which he writes.
From τότε it looks as if Pylus was
then no longer in the hands of the A.: if so this sentence was
written after A. lost Pylus in 409 B.C.
Μεγαρέων φυγάδες
—expclled in
the party struggle of 424 B.C., when Brasidas saved Megara from
falling into the
hands of A.
Σελινουντίοις
—S. was a
colony from Hyblaean Megara.
ξυμφορὰν
—i.e. their exile. Cf. calamitosus.
ἤδη
—from this
point, as in II. 96.3.
Ἀργεῖοι
—the alliance with A.
had been renewed in June 417 B.C.
ἔχθρας
— Argos, long the
rival of Sparta, had been humbled by her in 495 B.C.
τῆς παραυτίκα ἕκαστοι ἰδίας
ὠ.
—generally understood to mean
that they were mercenaries; but the plur
ἕκαστοι is against this. Possibly Haacke rightly refers to
Spartan and anti-Spartan factions in Argos.
Ἀρκάδων
— already heard of as
mercenaries in the Persian wars. Herod. VIII. 26
.
αἰεὶ
—at any time.
οὐδὲν ἧσσον
—i.e. though they
belonged to the same race
Κρησὶ . . . ξυγκτίσαντας
—the same change as in
c. 40.4
al
μετὰ μισθοῦ ἐλθεῖν
—cf. Isoc.
17. 46
μετὰ ποίας ἂν ἐλπίδος
ἦλθον ἐπὶ τοῦτον;
Δημοσθένους
—objective. They remembered
the victory which they had won in 426 under his lead. See on c. 16.1 l. 12.
εὐνοίᾳ
—most of the Acarnamans had been
allies of A. since 430. See on c. 31.2
κόλπῳ
—is sometimes omitted with ὁ Ἰόνιος.
Θούριοι καὶ Μ.
—see c.
33.5.
ἐν τοιαύταις κ.τ.λ.
—who,
when the Athenians came, had been reduced to such straits by a
rcvolution. With ἐν ἀνάγκαις
cf. ἀνάγκαις
ταῖσδ’ ἐνέζευγμαι
Aesch. PB 109
. τοιαύταις means such as
induced them to join the
A.
τότε
refers to c. 33.5, where we found that
Thurii had to be persuaded, while Metapontum in addition had passed
through a crisis (
καιροί). Now we find that Thurii also had suffered in
the same way. (τοιαύταις was first
explained thus by Bauer. It is obscure. Did Thuc. write ταῖς
αὐταῖς; or did he mean by
τοιαύταις that the στασιωτικοἰ
καιροὶ of Thurii ‘were such as I have described in the
case of Metapontum’?)
κατειλημμένοι
—
depreliensi, sc. ὑπὸ τῶν Ἀθηναίων
.
Νάξιοι καὶ Κ.
—c. 14.2
.
Ἐγεσταῖοι
—Segesta, as its
coins and the Romans call it, was chief city of the Elymians, who
were thought to be
Trojans. It was perpetually at war with Selinus. Life was difficult
in the W. corner
of Sicily owing to the constant rivalry of the Carthaginians and the
Greeks there.
In 409 Segesta joined Carthage in an attack on Selinus which
destroyed for ever the
greatness of that city.
οἵπερ ἐπηγάγοντο
—it is
indicative of the falling off of high sentiment at Athens that she
had consented to
aid the barbarian against a Greek town.
Σικελῶν τὸ πλέον
—it is easy to see why the
majority of the Sicels joined A. They did so early in the campaign
of 414, about June, when the 2nd Syracusan counter-wall had failed
to check the A. circumvallation and the besieging fleet had command
of the Great Harbour, when Syr. was in terror and peace was being
discussed there. See also on c. 1.4.
The Sicels hoped to use Athens as a means for diminishing Greek
influence in Sicily, and ever since A. had first interfered in
Sicily, they had shown a strong tendency to support her.
Τυρσηνῶν
—cf. c.
53.2.
τοσάδε . . . ἔθνη
—it must
have been very hard to get all these different elements to work with
a common will.
Καμαριναῖοι
—see on c. 33.1, as also for Γελῷοι .
Ἀκραγαντίνων
—Girgenti,
‘the fairest of mortal cities’ (Pind. Pyth. XII. 1), remained neutral throughout. Cf. on
c. 32.1. The life of Empedocles of
Acragas, 484-424, about covers the greatest period in the history of
Sicilian art.
ἐν τῷ ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνα
= μετ’
αὐτοὺς above.
οἵδε μὲν
—here
ὅδε refers to what precedes. This is very rare in prose
except in Herod. and Thuc. Cf. c. 58.2.
So with τοσόσδε in c. 57.11; 58.3
; 59.1; 78.1
.
Ἱμεραῖοι
—see on c.
1.1
μόνοι
—i e. they
are the only Greeks there.
οἰκοῦσιν
—used elsewhere in proximity to νέμεσθαι. These small things show how
ancient authors, like modern ones, unconsciously have their
mannerisms.
ἔθνη
— of small communities,
but referring to difference of origin.
Σικελοὶ μόνοι
—no Elymians,
Sicans, or Phoenicians joined Syr.
νεοδαμώδεις
— see on c. 19.3. With the helots they numbered 600
hoplites; Eceritus, a Spartan, had been sent in command of them, but
he must have returned.
μόνοι
—the C. alone sent both
ships and infantry. The Leucadians and Ambraciots sent ships only.
Λευκάδιοι καὶ Ἀ.
—were allies
of Sparta. Corinth was their mother-city.
ἀναγκαστοὶ
—see on c. 19.4 l. 33, and Index
s.v.
πρὸς
—in comparison
with.
μεγάλας
—not that they were
greater than Corinth and Sparta, but because their cities were large
they needed
less support from outside.
ἄλλος ὅμιλος
—light-armed troops ὅμιλος is confined to poetry, Herod.,
Thuc., and late authors. Thuc. uses it often.
τὴν ἄλλην
διάνοιαν
—their ulterior
purpose.
βουλευτέα
—the plur. of the
verbal replacing the sing. is esp. common in Thuc.
ταξίαρχοι
—not usually
present at the council. 6
ἐκπλευσόμενοι
—i.e. before
the eclipse.
ἔμελλον
—here introduces Oratio Obliqua.
τὰ ἄνω
—Epipolae was to be
abandoned There is nothing to show that they had quitted it before
this, as Arnold
thought.
διατειχίσματι
—by fencing
round a space at the end of the double wall. 14
τοῦ ἄλλου
—those who were not needed to
guard the narrow space.
ἀντιλήψεσθαι
—gain; the
word implies secure possession. So with
ἀντίληψις, seizure, grip, objection.
ὼς . . . καὶ
—see on c.
43.1.
καὶ ὁπωσοῦν
—with
ἐπιτήδειος.
ἡλικίας μετέχων
—i.e. not altogether ἐν τῷ ἀχρείῳ τῆς ἡλικίας (II. 44.4), and so fit for military
service. This must mean that non-combatants were to be used, for
none of the regular troops could have been otherwise than ἡ. μετέχων.
ἐπιτήδειος
—opposite of ἀχρεῖος or
ἄχρηστος, in a military sense.
καὶ
—and so.
ἐξ ἀναγκαίου
—in
desperate straits; best taken alone as an adverbial
phrase. (Some edd. make ἀν. fem.
agreeing with διανοίας, but τοιαυτης is then very awkward.)
Adverbial phrases with ἐκ are very
common.
τοιαύτης
—sc. ἐκ
, from the nature of their plan, i.e. considering the
difficulties that it involved.
κρατηθῆναι
—alluding to cc.
52-3.
ἄλλων
—see c. 4.3
.
ὁ μὲν ἀγὼν
—in the
coming struggle every one of us will be fighting for country and
for life just as
much as the enemy. If we win this battle at sea, every
individual may see again his
own home, wherever it may be. There is a different
nuance in πατρίδος as applied to
the A. and the Syr. For the use of τῳ
cf. Eur. Heraclid.
826
καὶ τῇ τεκούσῃ νῦν τιν’
ἀρκέσαι χρεών.
ἀθυμεῖν δὲ κ.τ.λ.
—but
we
must not despair, nor must we allow ourselves to feel like raw
recruits, for whom
a
defeat in their first battle fills all the future with
foreboding of similar
misfortunes.
τὴν ἐλπίδα
is defined by τοῦ
φόβου as ‘an expectation that falls in the sphere of
fear.’ Cf. Plat. Laws 644C
κοινὸν μὲν ὄνομα
ἐλπίς, ἴδιον δὲ φόβος μὲν ἡ πρὸ
λύπης ἐλπίς. θάρρος δὲ ἡ πρὸ τοῦ ἐναντίου. ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς
means the reverses they have met with.
ἀλλ’ ὅσοι τε
—no; all
of
you who are A., with the experience of many wars, all of you who
are allies, our
constant companions in arms, remember how calculation is baffied
in war, and, in
hopes that fortune may yet be with us, and resolved, as you see
your army before
you, to renew the struggle in a manner worthy of your numbers,
prepare.
πάρεστε
—occasionally the 3rd person is
found in such rel. clauses; e.g. Andoc. 1, 46 ὁπόσοι
ὑμῶν παρῆσαν, ἀναμιμνήσκεσθε; Lys.
12.97. So in Latin poets, as Ovid Trist. 3.4.75
et qua
quisque potest aliqua mala nostra levate.
See also on c. 64.2.
τῶν ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις
παραλόγων
—Thuc. insists on
the uncertainty, the inconsequence, of war so often
because he regards history, under normal conditions, as effect
following ascertainable causes. He introduced into history the
notion of law.
τὸ τῆς τύχης
— denoting a power acting by
some inscrutable method. Cf. Eur. Alc. 785
τὸ τῆς τύχης ἀφανὲς οἷ προβήσεται, τὰ τῆς
τύχης are the manifestations of this power.
κἂν μεθ’ ἡμῶν . . .
στῆναι
—cf. c.
77.3
ἱκανὰ γὰρ τοῖς πολεμίοις
ηὐτύχηται. Other statements by Nicias of a like
nature, showing how firmly he believed in the distribution during
life of rewards and punishments, are found in v.
16.1 ; VI. 11.6;
23.3. It is the idea that meets us in Aeschylus and
Herodotus.
ἀναμαχούμενοι
—generally with an accus.,
as Plato Hip. Maj. 286D
ἰέναι πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐρωτήσαντα, ἀναμαχούμενος τὸν
λόγον.
ὑμῶν αὐτῶν
—attracted into the rel.
clause, like ἕκαστος.
Ἃ δὲ ἀρωγὰ κ.τ.λ.
—we
on our side have dis cussed with the pilots and have provided
all the means in our
power which we found would help us in the narrow space of the
harbour against the
difficulties that gave us trouble before, namely the crowding of
the vessels and the
enemy's men on deck.
ἐπὶ
—describes the circumstances, as in II. 17
προῄδει
μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ ποτε αὐτὸ
κατοικισθησόμενον.
παρασκευὴν
—force. For the fact see c. 40.5.
οἷς
—neut., referring to ὄχλος and
παρασκευή.
ἐκ τῶν παρόντων
—cf. c. 77.1.
καὶ γὰρ τοξόται
κ.τ.λ.
—there will be many
archers and javelin
men on board
and very many whom in a battle out at sea we should not have
thought of using,
since
the overweighting of the ships would impede our skill; but here
being forced to
fight a land battle aboard ship, we shall find the plan
convenient.
διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν ἂν
—frequent
use. of the infin. with art. is a mark of the speeches and the
higher style.
πρόσφορα
—the rel. ᾦ is lost sight of. Cf. Herod. 9.33
τῇ τε
ἐπιμαχώτατον ἦν . . . καὶ πρόσοδος μάλιστα
ταύτῃ ἐγίνετο. For the plur. cf. c. 43.2.
ηὕρηται δ’ ἡμῖν
κ.τ.λ.
—we have worked
out all the plans
needed on our side
in the construction of our vessels, and to meet the thick beams
on the enemy's
prows
which gave us most trouble, we have arranged iron grapnels,
which when thrown at
them will prevent any ship that has struck us from backing, if
the marines work well
afterwards.
ηὕρηται ὴμῖν,
like ἡτοίμασται above, is another
example of the preference for the impers. pass. in Gk.
παχύτητας
—the plur. of the abstract used
distributively, as also ἐπιβολαί.
ᾧπερ is like ἐν ᾧ
referring to a preceding clause.
τῆς προσπεσούσης
—ἑκάστης
π.; cf. c. 65.2
τῆς νεώς.
τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις
—what
follows, i.e. boarding the ships. Cf. Aristoph.
Eccles. 82
τἀπὶ τούτοις δράσομεν
.
ἐς τοῦτο γὰρ κ τ λ.
—in
fact we have, as I said, been forced into fighting. For ἐς τοῦτο . . . ὥστε cf. c. 48.3 .
ὅσον ἂν . . . ἐπέχῃ
— ‘so
much as our troops will occupy.’
ὧν χρὴ κ.τ.λ.
—Bear
this
in mind, and fight to the end with all your strength; and do not
be driven ashore.
but when two ships strike, do not let them drive you off until
you have cleared the
heavy troops from the enemy's deck.
πρότερον . . . ἢ . . .
ἀπαράξητε
—πρότερον . . . ἢ occasionally stands
for πρότερον . . . πρὶν with
subj., indic. or infin. in Herod. and Thuc., but very rarely in
other authors, as Dem. 31.12 (early
speech) πρότερον
τοὺς ὅρους ἔστησεν ἢ ἐκεῖνον τὴν δίκην ὀφλεῖν. The
subj. without ἂν in temporal
sentences—after πρὶν,
πρὶν ἢ,
μέχρι—is also a mark of early prose.
ἀπαράξητε
—cf. c.
6.3
καὶ ταῦτα κ τ.λ.
—I am
now
addressing not so much the sailors as the soldiers, as it is on
the men on deck
that
this duty mainly falls: and at present we have still the
advantage of them in most
points with our infantry. The last clause betrays the
speaker's want of confidence.
τοῖς δὲ ναύταις
—Sailors,
I urge, nay more, I entreat you, not to be in any way too
overcome by your
misfortunes; you have now better arrangements above, and a
greater number of ships.
Think, I beg you, how well worth preserving is the pleasant
feeling that, being
thought Athenians so long even if you are not so, by your
knowledge of our language
and your imitation of our institutions you were admired in
Greece, and—as
far as advantages go—had as great a share as we in our empire,
while, in
the matter of respect from onr subjects and immunity from wrong,
you had much more
than we. This § appears to start with the 3rd pers.,
which is changed for the 2nd in ἐθαυμάζεσθε
(l. 18); but the Gk. orators habitually mingle statements about
people with direct address to them in this way.
τῷδε
—i.e. ἐν τῷ
περαινεῖν.
τὴν ἡδονὴν
—the pleasure
which he describes in the rel. clause following.
οἳ
—the antecedent, ὑμῖν, is omitted. The sentence ἀξία
ἐστὶν ἡ ἡδονὴ διασώσασθαι οἳ . . . ἐθαυμάζεσθε is
constructed like τὸ δ’ εὐτυχές, οἳ ἂν . . .
λάχωσιν in II. 44.1.
Ἀθηναῖοι νομιζόμενοι
— he means the ξένοι and
μέτοικοι serving as ναῦται;
at the same time he lays stress on the influence of the Athenian ὄχλος
ναυτικός. So in
[Xen.] Ath.
Pol. 2
οἱ κυβερνῆται καὶ
οἱ κελευσταὶ καὶ . . .
οἱ πρῳρᾶται
καὶ οἱ ναυπηγοί, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὴν δύναμιν περιτιθέντες τῇ
πόλει
πολὺ μᾶλλον ἢ οἱ ὁπλῖται καὶ οἱ γενναῖοι καὶ οἱ χρηστοί.
There was promotion from the lowest position as a rower to the
highest as κυβερνήτης. There would
be few true-born Athenians amongst the
ναῦται now owing to the disasters in Sicily. Prob. many θῆτες, who ordinarily served as
sailois, were employed as hoplites. 18,
τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ
—causal with θαυμάζω, as IV.
85.3, with φοβοῦμαι
II. 89.6.
τῶν τρόπων
—the private habits as
contrasted with the πολιτεία, the
public institutions, of Athens. The A. prided themselves both on
their πολιτεία and on their τρόποι .
ἐθαυμάζεσθε κατὰ τὴν
Ἑλλάδα
—Thuc., owing to
his own exile and his travels, would have good reason to know the
fact and to appreciate the value of the
ἡδονή.
ἔς τε τὸ φοβερὸν τοι—ς
ὑπηκόοις
—some of the
μετοικοι whom N. is supposed to be addressing must
have been by origin
υπήκοοι, so that Thuc. prob. means that those of them who
had served in the A. fleet were regarded with awe in their own
cities. φοβερὸν=‘causing fear’;
cf. on c. 42.3.
πολὺ πλεῖον
—chiasmns with οὐκ ἔλασσον. This passage, besides
containing an exaggeration (see crit. note), seems rather lacking
both in taste and in tact, even when we remember that most of the
doubtful supporters of A. had deserted. But it must be remembered
that none of the speeches in Thuc., and least of all the military
harangues, could possibly have been delivered. Sce Appendix I.
ὥστε κοινωνοὶ
κ.τ.λ.
—with you alone
we freely share our
empire; it is but
just that you should not betray it now; rather, filled with
scorn of the
Corinthians
whom you have often defeated and of the Sicilian Greeks, not one
of whom even
dared
to face us so long as our fleet was at its best, repel them, and
show that in
spite
of sickness and disaster your science is superior to another's
confidence while
succeeding.
ἐλευθέρως
—always understood to mean while
retaining your freedom and compared with VI. 85.2
ἐλευθέρως
ξυμμαχοῦντες. It implies this too; but it is meant as an
allusion to the generous spirit in which A had treated them. Cf. II. 37.2
ἐλευθέρως
τὰ πρὸς τὸ κοινὸν πολιτεύομεν.
καταφρονήσαντες
—paronomasia with
preceding word. The aor. is ingressive.
ἤκμαζε τὸ ναυτικὸν
—the
decline of the naval power of Athens meant the decline of her empire
over the
imagination of Greece. 30
ἑτέρας
—for
ἑτέρων, but preferred so as to correspond with ὑμετέρα.
εὐτυχούσης
— contrasted with καὶ μετ’ ἀσθενείας καὶ ξ. Observe this
very common use of μετὰ with
abstract nouns.
τούς τε Ἀ. κ.τ.λ.
—Those
of you who are A. I once again remind that you have at home no
ships in the docks
like these, no men fit for service, and that in the event of any
other issue than
victory, your enemies here will immediately sail thither, and
our friends who are
left there will not be strong enough to repel our enemies on the
spot together with
the invaders. And so, while you will immediately be at the mercy
of
Syr.—and you know yourselves the purpose you had in attacking
them—your countrymen will be at the mercy of Sparta.
οὔτε ναῦς
—at the beginning
of the Pel. war, the A. had 300 ships ready, and shortly afterwards
a reserve fleet
of 100 ships was created. The normal strength of the fleet during
the war was over
300.
ἡλικίαν
—conerete, like νεότης, and juventus.
The abstract term represents the young men as a power in the state.
τι ἄλλο ἢ τὸ
κρατεῖν
—Euphemism in alluding to
defeat is very
common, and Gk. authors habitually avoid close reference to the
scene of a disaster.
ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνα
—alluding, like ἐκεῖ, to Athens; both words were often
so used by persons abroad.
Ὥστε κ.τ.λ.
— ‘Therefore, in this one
struggle having to defend both yourselves and them, stand firm now,
if ever, and reflect each and all that you who are now to embark are
also to the Athenians infantry and ships and all that remains of the
state, and the great name of Athens. In defence of these, if any man
excel in skill or courage, let him show them now; he could not find
a better chance to display them for his own henefit and for the
safety of all.’ In this epilogue the end proposed by the speaker (τὸ τέλος Arist. Rhet.
B. 19, 26; τελικὸν κεφάλαιον
Hermogenes calls it) is τὸ συμφέρον,
having before been τὸ
καλόν. These two topics (τόποι)
are extremely common in military harangnes.
ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων
—alluding to οἱ μὲν in l. 9 and οἱ
δ’ in
καθεστῶτες
— with ἐν as in Herod.
VII. 139, but far commoner with ἐς.
Cf. παρεστάναι
ἐν τῇ γνώμῃ
Andoc. II. 24.
καθ’ ἑκάστους τε καὶ ξ.
—the mass is to act as a whole, and
yet each individual is to feel that the safety of the mass rests with him. It is again brought out below in αὐτός τε αὑτῷ . . . καὶ τοῖς ξύμπασι.
ὑμῶν . . . εἰσὶ
—with
‘partitive’ gen. 1st or 2nd person, the verb is generally in the 3rd
pers.
καὶ νῆες
—the statement οἱ ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ νῆες εἰσί is not very
sane. Apparently Thuc. has in mind that the ships which are to take
part and which cannot be replaced will not manœuvre—ἠν αγκάσμεθα
πεζομαχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν—so that the A. would be
depending much less than usual on their ships and much more on their
men. A ship when manned was to the Gks. a living thing. Here the
ships will be manned, and yet will be inert. Before condemning the
words right out we must notice the train of thought that has led
Thuc. to write them. (The speech from c. 63.3
to the end is not a good example of composition. Sce Appendix I.)
τὸ μέγα ὄνομα
—Isocr.
6.110
μὴ καταισχυνθῆναι τὸ
τῆς Σπάρτης ὄνομα. 18
περὶ ῶν
—prob. neuter, applying to πεζοὶ καὶ νῆες, etc.
προφέρει
=
προέχει, but used so only by Herod., Thuc., and poets.
Ὅτι μὲν καλὰ
κ.τ.λ.
—That our past
exploits have been
glorious, that it
is a glorious future for which we are about to fight, most of
you, we think, know:
otherwise you would not have devoted yonrselves with such
enthusiasm to your task.
But if any man has not so clear a perception of this as he
should have, we will make
it plain.
αὐτῶν = τῶν
προειργασμένων
καὶ τῶν μελλόντων.
Ἀθηναίους γὰρ
κ.τ.λ.
—the A., who came
to this country
intending first to
enslave S. and then, if they succeeded, the Pel. as well and the
rest of
Greece—the A. who possess an empire at present the largest of
all that
belong or ever have belonged to Greeks, you, the first to
withstand their navy
that
gave them all their power, have already defeated in several
battles by sea and are
probably going to defeat again now. Observe the
construction of this admirable sentence, and esp. the order.
ἔπειτ’
—as καὶ
follows, we should perhaps read ἔπειτα
δέ with B, since ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ
is the regular formula.
τῷ ναυτικῷ
—for the dat. after ὑφίστασθαι see L. and S. This is the
only instance in Thuc, since in II. 61.4,
which edd. compare, ξυμφορὰς τὰς μεγίστας
ὑφίστασθαι is the true) reading.
ἄνδρες γὰρ κ.τ.λ.
—for when men are
humbled in that wherein they claim to excel, what remains of their
selfrespect is more thoroughly weakened than if they had not thought
to excel (sc. προύχειν) from the
first, and while receiving a check from the unexpected outcome of
their boast, they give way even more than their real strength
necessitates. This we may suppose to be the case with the A. now
αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ
—a rhetorical
device for exhibiting the change in the condition of a thing, which
none the less
retains its identity.
τῷ παρ’ ἐλπίδα τοῦ
αὐχήματος
—if taken together, with
Classen and Bolime, this balances παρὰ ἰσχὺν
τῆς δυνάμεως better than if τοῦ
αὐχήματος is put with σφαλλόμενοι,
and τῷ παρ’ ἐλπίδα (=
unexpectedly) taken alone, with Bloomfield, Arnold, and Stahl. See
Appendix II.
ὃ νῦν
—the speaker shows that
while they themselves might well anticipate
victory, their enemies will look forward to nothing but defeat, and consequently will fail to
exert the power which they have. Bloomfield.
ἡμῶν δὲ κ.τ.λ.
—with
us
the spirit which we had before, in which while still
inexperienced we made a
desperate venture, is now snrer, and as we have added to it a
conviction that we
must be the strongest if we have defeated the strongest, every
man's hope is
doubled; and as a rule, in any enterprise, the greater a man's
hope the greater is
his readiness.
ἡμῶν τὸ ὑπάρχον
is our natural spirit, ὑπάρχω being habitually used of a
nation's qualities and mental characteristics. ἡμῶν is emphatic.
δοκήσεως
—this word is found
only in Herod. and Thuc. among prose authors.
τοῦ κρατίστους εἶναι
—here, as in c. 36.5 and VIII 87, the MSS. give τό, but it is unlikely that Thuc.
alone, and in these three places only, should have put the accus. to
explain a gen. or dat. See Appendix II. κρατίστους
. . . κρατίστους is traductio.
Τά τε τῆς κ.τ.λ.
—The counterfeits of our
method which they have devised are customary in our mode of
fighting, and we shall be prepared for every one of them. But they
will have a number of heavy infantry on deck contrary to custom, and
a number of javelin men from Acarnania and elsewhere,
mere landsmen aboard ship for the most part, who will not even find
out how to discharge their javelins in a sitting position. Must they
not endanger the ships and be thrown into utter confusion when they
do not move in their usual manner?
τὸ καθεστηκὸς
—the
‘established custom’ of all navies.
χερσαῖοι, ὡς εἰπεῖν
—most commentators since
Bauer say that ὡς εἰπεῖν
so
to speak is added because χερσαῖος
is used esp. of animals. This is very improbable: elsewhere in Thuc. ὡς
εἰπεῖν qualifies an universal statement, as II. 51 ; III. 38,
c. 39.82; VI. 30
; VIII. 5, 96.
There is no passage in which it is certainly used in any other
sense; nor is it clear that χερσαῖος
necessarily suggests animals.
καθεζομένους
—prob. literal,
and not merely ‘cramped’ as Goller thought.
ταράξονται
—see on c. 36.6. So
ὠφελήσομαι is often used in pass. sense.
ἐπεὶ καὶ κ.τ.λ.
—for
the
number of their ships will be no advantage to them, in case any
of you are alarmed
about your numerical inferiority in the coming battle. In a
small space many will be
slower in accomplishing their object, and completely exposed to
injury from our
devices.
πλήθει
—often used of
superior numbers.
ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι
—the construction, as
Classen says, is influenced by ἐς τὸ
δρᾶν. Elsewhere ῥᾴδιος
takes plain infin. Cf. II. 11.5
πρός τε τὸ
ἐπιέναι εὐψυχότατοι, πρός τε τὸ
ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι ἀσφαλέστατοι.
ἀφ’ ὧν
—for ἀπ’
ἐκείνων ἃ—i.e. the nom. of the rel. is attracted. This is
very unusual, and this is the only instance in Thuc.
τὸ δ’ ἀληθέστατον
κ.τ.λ.
—assure
yourselves of a plain fact from
information
which we think to be clear: it is because their distress is
overpowering and
because
they are forced by their present misery that they are reduced to
the desperate
expedient of risking a battle as best they can, trusting more to
fortune than to
orderly preparation. Their purpose is either to force their way
out by sea or to
retreat by land after the battle; for they know that their
plight could not possibly
be worse than it is.
βιαζόμενοι ὑπὸ
—see on c. 13
παρασκευῆς . . . τύχης
—the same antithcsis in IV. 55. So
γνώμη and τύχη are
very often contrasted. Thuc. thinks of Nicias. But παρασκευὴ is not ‘actual force’ here,
as Bloomfield and Arnold say, but it is τὸ
παρεσκευάσθαι, the opposite of
ἀταξία in c. 68.1.
Πρὸς οὖν ἀταξίαν
κ.τ.λ.
—Therefore against
such disorderly and such bitter enemies whose fortune
has already submitted, let us advance with eagerness, and let us
think that men act lawfully towards an enemy, when purposing to
retaliate upon the aggressor they determine to satisfy their heart's
animosity, and also that we shall have the delight of repelling our
foes, and that this is proverbially most pleasant.
ἀταξίαν . . . καὶ
τύχην
—referring back to
παρασκευῆς and τύχης
.
νομιμώτατον εἶναι . . . οἳ
ἂν
—this kind of
combination is idiomatic and oecurs throughout Attic. Cf. on c. 63.3 From the analogy of other
constructions in Gk., and from a comparison of the instances, it is
more likely that the idiom is based on a brachylogy than on a
combination of two constructions. Cf. Xen.
Hel. II. 3.51
νομίζω προστάτου ἔργον
εἶναι οἵου δεῖ, ὃς ἂν . . .
μὴ ἐπιτρέπη?.
ὡς ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ
—ἐπὶ
and a noun frequently take the place of a final clause.
δικαιώσωσιν
—an Ionic and old
Attic word.
ἀποπλῆσαι
—
explere, as τὴν φιλονικίαν
ἐκπιμπλάναι
III. 82.8.
τῆς γνώμης τὸ θυμούμενον
—cf. I.
90
τὸ βουλόμενον τῆς γνώμης
; 2.59
τὸ
ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γ. ; III.
10.1
τὸ διαλάσσον τῆς γ.
; V. 9
τὸ
ἀνειμένον τῆς γ. For τὸ
θυμούμενον
wrath cf. Eur.
Hec. 299 .
ἐκγενησόμενον
—the partic. depends on νομίσωμεν, in spite of the infin. δίκαιον εἶναι (and ἥδιστον
εἶναι). But then with the partic. νομίσωμεν =
εἰδῶμεν.
καί . . . ἥδιστον εἶναι
—sc. τὸ
ἐχθροὺς ἀμύνασθαι. They are to think that their conduct
(1) νομιμώτατον εἶναι—is in
accordance with custom and right, (2) ἥδιστον
εἶναι—is in accordance with the proverb that expresses
that custom. (I am unable to accept the interpretation hitherto
given of this passage. See crit. note.)
τὸ λεγόμενόν που
—this is in accordance with the
ancient love of revenge; but Thuc., like Euripides, had reason to
know that there was something better. Cf. Eur.
Ba. 877
τί τὸ κάλλιον | παρὰ θεῶν γέρας
ἐν βροτοῖς | ἢ
χεῖρ’ ὑπὲρ κορυφᾶς | τῶν
ἐχθρῶν
κατέχειν
; For the proverb cf. Juv.
13.180
at vindicta bonum vita jucundius
ipsa, where Mayor refers to Iliad
18.108.
ὡς δὲ ἐχθροὶ κ
τ.λ.
—that they are our enemies,
nay our bitterest enemies, you all know: for they invaded our land
to make us slaves; and had they succeeded in that, they would have
inflicted on our men the worst penalty (i
e. death), on onr wives and children the worst
indignities (i.e. slavery), on the whole city the most disgraceful
reproach (i.e. dependence).
ἀνθ’ ὧν μὴ
κ.τ.λ.
—wherefore no man should
feel for them.
nor think it
gain that they should depart without danger to us. That is all
they will do even
if
they win the battle; but the prize—to punish them when we have
gained our
desire, as we probably shall do, and to confirm for the whole of
Sicily the
liberty
which she already enjoyed—is a glorious one. How few ventures
there are in
which the loss in case of failure is as small as the gain
through success is
great.
τινα
—cf. c. 61.1
.
ἀκινδύνως
—certainly not ‘without doing
us further harm’ (Holden); which would involve a paradox that would
scarcely be convincing to men who had suffered so much; but ‘without
our having to run (a further) risk,’ as is shown by ἀγών and, above all, by κινδύνων below.
πραξάντων
—sc.
ἡμῶν. Beside εὖ (κακῶς, etc.) ποιεῖν,
πράττειν, neut. plur. adj. are regularly used with ποιεῖν, πράττειν.
ἃ βουλόμεθα
—sc.
πρᾶξαι, not, as Kruger, the fate which we wish for them, but for ourselves.
Victory is meant.
καὶ τῇ πάσῃ
Σ.
—Confirmed the charters
that were yours
before:— | No parleying now! In Britain is one breath
Wordsworth, To the Men of Kent.
βεβαιοτέραν παραδοῦναι
—the language is
taken from the tenure of property.
καρποῦσθαι is in contrast with the βεβαιοτέρα
κτῆσις which is to be bestowed (
παραδοῦναι) on them. The subject changes at παραδοῦναι.
καλὸς ὁ ἀγών
—notice that ὁ ἀγών is in apposition with τὸ .
. . κολασθῆναι . . . καὶ παραδοῦναι, for this is the
right way of taking the words, instead of making τὸ κολασθῆναι
καἱ παραδοῦναι subject and ὁ
ἀγών part of the pred., as the edd say.
κινδύνων κ.τ.λ.
—the speech ends with a γνώμη, or general truth, a form of
close of which Thuc. is very fond. Cf. c. 77
end.
σπανιώτατοι
—again we have the
accumulation of superlatives noticed at c.
42.3
σφαλῆναι βλάπτοντες
—σφαλλω and
βλάπτω are often near neighbours.
καὶ οἱ μὲν
—the description
of the last battle has been much admired both in ancient and in
modern times.
Dionysius Hal. quotes much of it and praises it warmly; it is also
commended by
Lucian, and by Gibbon, Gray, Macaulay.
ᾐσθάνοντο
—sc. πληροῦντας
τὰς ναῦς.
ὅπερ πάσχουσιν
—sc. οἱ ἄνθρωποι, which is very often
omitted thus; e.g. Plat. Crat. 387C
ὀνομάζοντες
γάρ που λέγουσι τοὺς λόγους.
σφίσιν
—i.e. Nicias and his men.
αὐτοῖς
—prob.=to
them, i.e. τοῖς στρατιώταις:
but Classen takes it to mean by them, i.e. τοῖς
στρατηγοῖς.
ἀνεκάλει
—called by
name, )( ἀποκαλεῖν.
πατρόθεν τε
ἐπονομάζων
—mentioning
the father's name as well (ἐπ‐).
Cf. Aristot. Ath. Pol. 21.4
ταύτας
ἐπονομόσας τριττῦς.
αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστὶ
—does not add
any fresh information, but heightens the impressiveness of the
description.
φυλήν
—men were officially
addressed by the name of their deme; but here the tribe is chosen
because of its
military character.
τό τε καθ’ ἑαυτόν
κ.τ.λ.
—admonishing those
who had any
reputation of their
own not to be false to it.
τὸ
καθ’ ἑαυτόν is taken as object of
προδιδόναι, and the schol. explains it as τὴν οἰκείαν ἀρετήν; but elsewhere in
Thuc. τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν means either
(1) in
person, used adverbially, as in Dem.
21.140
τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν ὅπως δύναται
, Aristoph.
Eq. 513
χορὸν αἰτοίη καθ’ ἑαυτόν,
or (2) his own division; and it may well be
used in the former sense here. But it should be connected with what
follows, in the sense ᾧ ὑπῆρχε λαμπρότητός
τι τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτόν, the order being modified for the
sake of the antithesis with τὰς π.
ἀρετάς.
οἱ πρόγονοι
—observe the sentiment in
which the last appeal of Nicias is grounded. Thuc knew well that the
reverence felt by his countrymen for the past was excessive; cf. l.
22 below. Pericles also certainly discouraged this excess and tried
to direct the A. to the future. But Thuc. is right in making N. lay
stress on the glory of the past here, and no doubt N. really did so. ἀρετὰς is deeds
of
valour as usual.
ἀφανίζειν
—contrasted with ἐπιφανεῖς.
πατρίδος τῆς
ἐλευθερωτάτης
—the order puts
emphasis on the adj., and the statement is true of Athens itself;
but she had unduly neglected the claims of her subjects and thus
enabled Sparta to raise the cry of ἐλευθερία
by which a great part of Greece was deluded.
ὑπομιμνῄσκων
—this word is often used
when people are reminded of something dear to them and absent, for
which they fecl a longing (πόθος).
τῆς ἐν αὐτῇ κ.τ.λ.
=
ὅτι ἑκάστῳ ἐν αὐτῇ ἀνεπιτάκτως
διαιτᾶσθαι
ἔξεστι.’ Classen. ‘It is noteworthy that this
special feature of the great democracy should be the one picked out
at such an hour as this as the thing which had gone further than
anything to endear Athens to her children.
Freeman
.
Pericles in the Funeral Oration says ‘In our daily intercourse we
are as tolerant as in our public life . . . we are not angry with
our neighbour for doing as he pleases.’ II.
37.2 .
ἄλλα τε
—τε
joins λέγων to the preceding
words.
τοῦ καιροῦ
—cf. c. 2
οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν
κ.τ.λ.
—all that men would
say, not guarding against seeming to talk commonplaces, and urging
what does duty on all occasions (ὑπὲρ
ἁπάντων) to the same effect about wives and
children and ancestral gods; still because they think it to be
useful, they appeal to it.
καὶ ὑπὲρ
—with this καὶ supply εἴποιεν
ἄν, but not ὅσα, since
the influence of the relative is as usual lost in the second member
of the sentence; and so Thuc eeases to tell us directly what Nicias
said, and instead tells us what men always say under such
circumstances. And so ἐπιβοῶνται
(see note below) is added at the end. (Hitherto there have been two
explanations of this καί: (1)
Goller, followed by most modern edd., takes
καὶ as ‘though,’ so that the following words are in
apposition to ὅσα; (2) καὶ=‘and,’ joins προφερόμενα to the idea contained in οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν . . . φυλαξάμενοι,
which virtually=ἀρχαῖα, note in
Jowett. Both explanations require that
ἐπιβοῶνται should be considered grammatically dependent on ὅσα; but this is not likely, and καὶ ὑπὲρ κ.τ.λ. comes in very awkwardly
on either of the two suppositions.) The lit. rendering is ‘and they
would say things which are brought forward on all occasions.’
παραπλήσια
—pred. to προφερόμενα.
ἔς τε γυναῖκας
—cf.
ές after many verbs of saying, as ᾄδειν,
αἰνίττεσθαι, ποιεῖν (to compose).
θεοὺς πατρῴους
—esp. Apollo
and Zeus; prob. also Athena.
ἀλλ’
—the influence of ὅσα being entirely lost, ἀλλ’ . .
.
ἐπιβοῶνται is contrasted with ὅσα
. . .
εἵποιεν ἃν οὐ φυλαξάμενοι . . ., καὶ (εἴποιεν ἂν) . . . προφερόμενα.
ἐπιβοῶνται
—sc. τὰ
. . . προφερόμενα. So III. 59.2
θεοὺς ἐπιβοώμενοι; VIII.
92
ἐπιβοωμένου . . . μὴ ἀπολέσαι τὴν
πατρίδα. This meaning of
ἐπιβοᾶσθαι
to invoke=
ἐπικαλεῖσθαι is not to be found in Attic prose outside
Thuc.
ἀναγκαῖα
—what would just
suffice.
πεζὸν
—see c. 60.2
.
τὸν παρακλῃσθέντα
διέκπλουν
—the
opening that had been closed, with chains. When the ζεῦγμα had been formed by the Syr.,
they must have left a gap in the centre to admit their own ships.
Doubtless this gap could be closed with chains, as in the case of λιμένες
κληστοί. See c. 70 l. 15.
(None of the MSS. readings yield a satisfactory sense; παραλειφθέντα is strongly supported,
but there is no sign in the narrative that there was a gap left
open. In any case Thuc. has here, as elsewhere, neglected to tell us
something which he should have told us.)
προεξαγαγόμενοι
—putting
off before them.
καὶ
=
atque 7
αἱ νῆες
—sc. τῶν
Ἀθηναίων.
τοῖς Συρακοσίοις
—does the dat. with ἄρχειν answer the question ‘where,’ or
‘for whom’? Cf. II. 2.1
Πυθοδώρου
ἄρχοντος Ἀθηναίοις.
οἱ ἄλλοι
—the A. on
their
part; ἄλλος being
exclusive.
τῶν τεταγμένων νεῶν πρὸς
αὑτῷ
—this order of the prep and
case is not very
uncommon in the best prose.
σφίσι
—should be
αὐτοῖς, as οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι
is not the subj. of the principal verb (
ἐγίγνετο).
οὐ πρὸς τῷ ζεύγματι κ.τ λ.
—
the fight, the fiercest fight of the whole war, became
general, not in the
shape of two great fleets meeting each other in ordered
array, but in that of a
crowd of separate battles going on everywhere at once, over
the whole surface of
the Great Harbour.
Freeman
.
ἐθεράπευον
—
ἐπεμελοῦντο.
μὴ λείπεσθαι
—that
these
on deck should not fall behind the rest in skill, the
combatants being contrasted with the sailors and pilots. With τῆς ἄλλης
τέχνης cf. ἑτέρας εὐτυχούσης
ῥώμης c. 63
τέ
— in fact, summing up
the preceding details.
Chacun
enfin, à sa poste, brûlait de paraîtie le premier.
Girard
.
ἐμβολαὶ . . . προσβολαὶ
—the distinction drawn
in note on c. 34 l. 25 accords with
Poppo. But the explanation of Arnold fits the passage better: ἐμβολὴ, Arn. says, is the attack made
by a ship with her beak, in the regular manner. Προσβολὴ is more general. Here it
denotes accidental collisions. But elsewhere it means a regular
charge.
ἀνακρούσεις . . .
διέκπλους
—see on c. 36.4 ll. 29, 37.
ἄλλῃ
—sc. νηί
.
προσφέροιτο
—opt. of indef.
frequency again.
ἐπιβαίνειν
—here with simple dat.;
usually with ἐπὶ and accus.; or,
meaning to
set foot in, with gen. Cf. the use of ἐπὶ with either gen. or dat. in a local
sense.
ξυνετύγχανέ τε
—and so
it
happened . . . that.
τὰ μὲν ἄλλοις
κ.τ.λ.
—while on the one
side they struck
others, on the
other they were themselves struck.
τοῖς κυβερνήταις
κ.τ.λ.
—the pilots
found themselves forced to
guard against
one party and make plans against another, and not singly, but at
many points on
every side, i.e. having to deal with several enemies at
the same time.
κατά τε τὴν τέχνην
—as
their work required it and in the excitement of the moment.
ἐπιβοῶντες
—anacoluthon after πολλὴ . . . ἐγίγνετο, as in c.
42.2. Badliam and Herwerden bracket it on the ground that
Thuc. would have written ἐπιβοώμενοι.
But it is quite possible to consider the
κελευσταὶ as a separate body from the ὲπιβάται and other combatants, who are
indicated by τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις.
περὶ τῆς
—in defence
of,
περὶ standing in
the sense of ὑπέρ, as often in
Demosth.
εἴ ποτε καὶ αὖθις
—if
ever again.
ἀντιλαβέσθαι
—absolute, as in II. 8.1. 61
ἐπαυξῆσαι
—means to add to
the importance of a person or thing.
μὴ κατ’
ἀνάγκην
—unnecessarily.
Cf. οὐ δῑ ὀλίγου below. How is the
difierence of neg. accounted for?
φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν
—
traductio, for the sake of heightening the contrast.
ὅ τε ἐκ τῆς γῆς
—the following vivid description of
the behaviour of the troops on shore exhibits a curious
approximation to the romantic spirit, but it wants the pathos and
the freedom of romanticism; and, fine as it is, the choice and the
presentment of the details serve to show how entirely foreign to
Thucydides' genius the romantic spirit was. This living
picture is finely imitated by Gibbon in his account of
the siege of Constantinople by Mahomet II. in 1453.
πολὺν τὸν ἀγῶνα . . .
εἶχε
—cf. III.
49.1
ἦλθον ἐς ἀγῶνα τῆς δόξης
.
ξύστασιν
—synonym of ἀγών.
φιλονικῶν
—
les Siciliens désiraient obtenir une gloire plus grande,
et les
Athéniens redoutaient un sort plus juste encore que leur
condition
présente.
Girard
.
ἀνακειμένων . . . ἐς τὰς
ναῦς
—as everything
depended on the fleet. Cf. Eur. Hec.
802
ὃς εἰς σ’
ἀνελθὼν εἰ διαφθαρήσεται κ.τ.λ.
οὐδενὶ ἐοικὼς
—cf. on c. 29
διὰ τὸ ἀνώμαλον
—as
the
fortune of the battle varied, so they received of necessity
varying
impressions. (Valla supposed that there is a reference
in this passage to ‘the unevenness of the ground’; but this is not
likely either from what follows or from the condition of the coast.
Being close to the water, they could not get a view of the whole.)
l 11.
δῑ ὀλίγου
—local; cf. c. 36.5.
ἀνεθάρσησαν ἂν
—this is the only example
in Thuc. of the iterative ἂν with
indic. aor. or imperf. (On this construction sec Mr. Seaton in Classical
Review III. p. 343 fol.)
ἐπὶ τὸ ἡσσώμενον
=τοὺς
ἡσσωμένους. Cf. Eur. Supp.
706
ἦν δ’ ἀγὼν
ἰσόρροπος . . . οὐ γὰρ τὸ
νικῶν τοῦτ’
ἐκήδευεν, μόνον | ἀλλ’ ᾤχετ’
ἐς
τὸ κάμνον οἰκείου στρατοῦ.
ἀπὸ τῶν δρωμένων τῆς
ὄψεως
—ἀπὸ
belongs to τῆς ὄψεως, the order
being the same in c. 20.1; 24.2; 31.5
; 32.1. But, when the art. is inserted
with both nouns, this order is very rare in Attic prose outside
Thuc. It occurs often in Herod.
τῶν ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ
= τῶν
μαχομένων.
τὸ ἀκρίτως
ξυνεχὲς
—‘the continued
uncertainty. ἀκρίτως γενομένης τῆς ἁμίλλης.
Schol. Notice the freedom with which nouns can be qualified by
adverbs.
ἴσα τῇ δόξῃ
—according
to their feelings.
ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα
—cf. c. 19.4.
παρ’ ὀλίγον
—cf. c.
2.4 l. 31ZZZ, and the idiom παρὰ
μικρόν παρ’ οὐδὲν ἐλθεῖν with infin.
πάντα ὁμοῦ ἀκοῦσαι
—cf. Eur. Supp. 710
ἔρρηξε
δ αὐδήν,
ὥσθ’ ὑπηχῆσαι χθόνα· | ὦ
παῖδες, εἰ μὴ σχήσετε
στερρὸν
δόρυ | σπαρτῶν τόδ’ ἀνδρῶν,
οἴχεται
τὰ Παλλάδος· and Eur.
Heraclid. 838
ἦν δὲ δύο κελεύματα,
| ὦ τὰς
Ἀθήνας, ὦ τὸν Ἀργείων γύην | σπείροντες,
οὐκ
ἀρήξετ’ αἰσχύνην πόλει
; and Eur. Heraclid. 832
πόσον τιν’
αὐχεῖς πάταγον ἀσπίδων βρέμειν | πόσον τινὰ
στεναγμὸν οἰμωγήν θ’
ὁμοῦ<*>
ὀλοφυρμός
—apposition to πάντα. The accus. might have been used
as object of ἀκοῦσαι.
νικῶντες, κρατούμενοι
—as though ἦσαν ἀκοῦσαι had preceded. The cries
would be νικῶμεν, κρατούμεθα.
ἅλλα
—instead of
τἆλλα. So alia is common in Livy in
place of cetera. The asyndeton heightens the
effect.
ὅσ’ ἃν . .
ἀναγκάζοιτο
—ὄσ’
ἂν for ὅσα of MSS. is
necessary because the clause does not apply to the Λ. only, but contains a reference to
the cries that any army would utter εἰ ἐν
μεγάλῳ κινδύνῳ
εἴη.
αὐτοῖς
—i.e. τοῖς
Ἀθηναίοις.
πρίν γε δὴ
—cf. on c.
39
λαμπρῶς
—decisively, with κατεδίωκον. Cf. c.
55.1; and II. 7.1
λελυμένων
λαμπρῶς τῶν σπονδῶν; VIII. 66.3
; 75.2.
μετέωροι
—used similarly in II. 91.3 referring to the middle of the
Corinthian Gulf.
κατενεχθέντες
—like καταφερομένας in c. 53.1. Contrast
προσφέρεσθαι c.
70.5. The corresponding sentence in Diodorus makes this
clearer: τῶν δὲ Ἀθηναίων ὄσοι μὴ μετέωροι
διεφθάρησαν, ἐπεὶ πρὸς
τὰ βράχη προσηνέχθησαν, ἐκπηδῶντες ἐκ τῶν νεῶν ἀπολομένων εἰς τὸ
πεζὸν
στρατόπεδον ἔφευγον.
οὐκέτι διαφόρως
—i.e. no
longer with the variety of feeling mentioned above.
ὁρμῆς
—of passionate impulse, as in III. 36.2.
οἰμωγῇ τε καὶ στόνῳ
—with παρεβοήθουν. Dative of manner. See
Rutherford, Syntax p. 66.
δυσανασχετοῦντες
—Pollux III. 130 says that this word was first
used by Thuc.; it is fairly frequent in late authors
τὰ γιγνόμενα
—Kruger compares φθονεῖν τί τινι.
τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ τείχους
=τὸ
διατείχισμα.
περὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς . . .
διεσκόπουν
—cf. Lycurgus 107 περὶ
τοὺς
ἄλλους ποιητὰς οὐδένα λόγον ἔχοντες.
ξυμφορῶν
—preferable to ξυμπασῶν, which is colourless and adds
nothing to οὐδεμιᾶς. The
consternation was the greatest of
their misfortunes.
καὶ
—after
παραπλήσια as in c. 70.1.
προσαπώλλυντο
—the imperf. of ὄλλυμι is often used as here of that
which is in danger of happening. Cf. γίγνομαι,
δίδωμι. It here corresponds with ἀνέλπιστον
ἦν σωθήσεσθαι.
ἐν
—the perf. partic. of a verb of motion
implies rest in, and so ἐν can be
used.
ὑπονοήσας
—
ὑπονοεῖν, like ὑποπτεύειν,
sometimes= to view with suspicion, sometimes to
conjecture.
ἀποχωρῆσαι . . .
περιιδεῖν
—the infin. with περιορᾶν occurs only in Herod. and
Thuc.
λέγων ταῦτα ἂ καὶ αὐτῷ
ἐδόκει
—probably this means saying
what he
personally
thought they ought to do This interpretation is strongly
supported by οἱ δὲ ξυνεγίγνωσκον μὲν καὶ
αὐτοὶ and ἐδόκει ποιητέα εἶναι
below, with which καὶ αὐτῷ brings
our clause into connexion. (The recent edd. who retain these words
offer several suggestions, but all except Classen give alternatives
and say that the meaning cannot be determined. Classen says ‘saying
that which seemed to him from his own conjecture probable,’ thus
agreeing with Haacke, Goller, and Arnold. But Bloomfield rightly
says that the Syr. knew that the A. would retreat even before the
battle—c. 67 Stall and Herwerden reject
the words. I think that the edd. have all mistaken the meaning of ἐδόκει, which refers not to the
knowledge of Hermocrates, but to his advice. Valla translates ‘Commemorans haec et alia quae
ipsi videbantur,’ which, whatever he read, is certainly not
what Thuc. meant.)
ἀποικοδομῆσαι
—sc. χρεών.
τὰ στενόπορα
—those among the
hills west of Syr.
προφθάσαντας
—Classen, Bohme, and Widmann
prefer διαλαβόντας of B, and it is
perhaps right. That διαλαμβάνω
does not occur elsewhere in Thuc. does not count, as this part of
the narrative contains several rare words and ἀγωνισμός, ἀντιτέχνησις, δυσανασχετῶ,
and ἐπιφήμισμα, which are not
found again in Thuc. προλαμβάνοντες
is explained by the schol. φθάνοντες, ὥστε
μὴ καταλαμβάνεσθαι at IV. 33.
Possibly Thuc. wrote
προδιαλαβόντας.
ξυνεγίγνωσκον
—the prep. here
has an adverbial force.
ἁσμένους . . .
ἀναπεπαυμένους
—so Sallust Jug. 53, 5 lacti quierant,
Postgate's certain correction of laetique erant.
ἀναπεπαυμένους . .
. ἑορτῆς
οὔσης
—cf. c. 51.1.
Ἡρακλεῖ . . . θυσία
—the Syr set great store by
the fact that the battle fell on a day sacred to Heracles, whose
temple was on the hill close to the point at which the A. double
wall touched it. Plut. Nic. 25 says
that their
μάντεις had reported that Heracles required that they
should not begin the action. (For the speculations of Timaeus in
after times see Plut.
Nic 1.)
οὐ δοκεῖν
—the verb of ‘saying’ has to be
supplied from ξυνεγίγνωσκον by an
idiom common in Gk. Oratio
Obliqua.
ἂν with
ἐθελῆσαι.
πρὸς πόσιν τετράφθαι
—the metaphorical meaning
of τρέπεσθαι πρὸς is much commoner
than the literal.
σφῶν
—the gen. with πείθομαι is frequent in Herod. but is
not found anywhere else in Attic prose.
πείθεσθαι is here synonymous with
ὺπακοῦσαι of l. 20; and the gen. is also helped by πάντα.
ἐξελθεῖν
—depends on πείθεσθαι, which takes sometimes
infin., sometimes ὥστε with infin.
ἐπὶ τούτοις
—in
conseqnence.
καθ’ ἡσυχίαν
—see on c. 38.3.
πέμπει
—asyndeton after a
demonstrative is fairly common.
ἐξ ὅσου
= ἐς
τοσοῦτον ἐξ ὅσου, the antecedent being omitted as in Plat. Phaedo 78B
ὅθεν
ἀπελίπομεν ἐπανέλθωμεν, and often with relative
adverbs.
διάγγελοι
—one would have thought that it
was high time for even Nicias to be somewhat sceptical. Moreover he
had played a similar trick on the Syr. early in 414 It is strange
too that any man who had appeared in the
δικαστήρια should not have understood the art of lying.
But their sufferings prob. unnerved the A. for the time.
τῶν ἔνδοθεν
—neut.
παρεσκευάσθαι
—impersonal.
καὶ ἡ ἀνάστασις
—elsewhere this καὶ always follows ὡς
ut, not ἐπειδὴ
postquam.
δεινὸν οὖν ἦν κ.τ.λ.
—probably this passage, which
all edd. admit to be exceedingly obscure, means lit.: ‘not only in
respect of one point in their condition was it terrible that they
were departing after losing all their ships and, in contrast with
their high hopes, having to face danger, both to themselves and
their city, but also at the same time, as they left the camp, every
man encountered things that were painful both to look upon and to
think of.’ (The meaning of καθ’ ἓν
τῶν πραγμάτων is not certain, and the words might
safely be ‘skipped.’ Classen thinks that they may be, and Stahl is
certain that they are corrupt. Sitzler reads
ἐκεῖνο for καθ’ ἕν. Only
Bohme-Widmann are entirely satisfied, taking καθ’
ἓν
τῶν πραγμάτων as subject of δεινὸν
ἦν—which I agree with Stahl is impossible—and
understanding, with Haase, in
unum
contracta rerum gestarum summa.)
καθ’ ἓν
—means generally (1) in detail,
singly; but sometimes (2) in one respect, for one reason, as in II. 89.7. Thuc. is contrasting ἓν with πολλά,
and means the fact that they were leaving with
loss and danger was terrible not on one account only, but for many
reasons, and the many reasons are expanded into the clause ἀλλὰ καὶ, etc., which again is
developed in §§ 3, 4, through which the general idea δεινὸν ἦν οὐ καθ’ ἓν runs—bnt the
subject clause, ὅτι . . κινδυνεύοντες,
is lost sight of. καθ’ ἓν γίγνεσθαι
= in unum cogi.
τῶν πραγμάτων
—expresses the sphere of
circumstances in which there were many points of horror, and the
circum= stances are those of the ἀποχώρησις
.
ὅτι τάς τε κ.τ.λ.
—Haase and Rauchenstein alone
take this as subject of δεινὸν
ἦν, but the notes will show that they are prob. right.
ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει
—this being a quasi-temporal word, Thuc. might perhaps have
omitted ἐν, as he does with πόλεμος,
ἑσβολή.
νεκρῶν
—see on c. 74
l. 20.
μετὰ φόβου
—partly because
they had neglected a duty so sacred as burial, partly because the
dead if unburied
were likely to haunt the living, partly because they had not gone
through the rites
of self-purification.
οἱ . . .
καταλειπόμενοι
—those who were
being left
behind
alive. Cf. οἱ λειπόμενοι=‘the
survivors.’
τοῖς ζῶσι
—observe that we require here
an antithesis to τοῖς
καταλειπομένοις—hence the various alterations
proposed. But Thuc. may have been guilty of a false antithesis here,
as his admirer Lucretius very often is. There is a similar error in
Cic. de legibus
II. 44
quod constat et ex vexandis vivorum animis et ea fama mortuorum, ut eorum exitium et judicio
vivorum et gaudio comprobetur—unless for the second vivorum we should read
bonorum, as proposed by P. Thomas.
τῶν ἀπολωλότων ἀθλιώτεροι
—the
antithesis between the peace of honourable death and the misery of
disgraced life
became a stock theme of the schools.
καθίστασαν
—sc.
αὐτούς.
ὅσον
—
quantum. This seems more expressive than the Vatican
ἐς ὅσον
, quousque, which is generally adopted.
τῳ
—the dat. with
προλείπειν is unusual.
ῥώμη
—spirit. It suggests
high nervous tension—with which Athenians were rarely troubled—as in II. 43.6.
οὐκ ἄνευ ὀλίγων
—Valla wrongly renders non sine multis obtestationibus, and all the
edd. have mistaken the meaning. The wounded and weak did not stop
until they were so utterly exhausted both in body and mind that they
could utter only a few appeals and groans. So far from there being
no sense in ὀλίγων, there is a
terrible amount of sense in it, both as a description of the scene
and as an indication of the temperament of Thuc as a man and as an
artist.
ἐπιθεασμῶν
—Cobet has shown that this is
the true orthography, not ἐπιθειασμῶν.
Hesych. ἐπιθεάζει· θεοὺς ἐπικαλεῖται
.
ἀπολειπόμενοι
—being
parted from them
ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει
τοῦ στρατοπέδου, Cf. on l. 27. The preference which most
edd show for the Vat. ὑπολειπόμενοι
is mexplicable.
ὥστε κ.τ.λ.
—this gives the consequence of
all the ἀλγεινὰ of l. 12, and thus
carries us back to δεινὸν ἦν.
δάκρυσι
—the dat. with πίμπλημι, instead of gen., is poetical.
ἀπορίᾳ
—causal dat.
ἐκ πολεμίας
—sc. ἀφορμωμένους.
ἀφορμᾶσθαι shows that this sentence recalls ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει τοῦ ς. It is
interesting to notice that the whole passage from § 2 to § 4, though
it contains statements of fact, happens to be arranged in the form
of a rhetorical cnthymeme, and is therefore
very characteristic of Thuc.
ἢ κατὰ δάκρυα
—Herod. III.
14
μέζω κακὰ ἢ ὥστε
ἀνακλαίειν. In
giavissimo maerore ne lacrimis quidem locus. Haacke.
τῶν ἐν ἀφανεῖ
—in such passages we have the
best indication of the historian's own religious views as purely
negative. In this matter he was in accord with Protagoras, and, as
in other matters, with Euripides, at least until the poet's
recantation in his old age. Cf. on c. 86.5
.
κατήφειά
—exprime un
sentiment de honte qui fait baisser les yeux. Didot. Cf. Eur. Med. 956
τί
δὴ κατηφεῖς ὄμμα,
καἰ δακρυρροεῖς; Having completed the description of
the ἀλγεινὰ in the form of an cnthymeme, Thuc. now goes back to the
grammatical subject of δεινον οῦν
ἦν § 2, viz., ὅτι τάς τε ναῦς
ἀπολωλεκότες πάσας
ἀπεχώρουν καὶ ἀντὶ
μεγάλης ἐλπίδος . . . κινδυνεύοντες. These two aspects
of the αποχώρησις —viz., the loss
and the change which the loss involved to all —are dealt with in §§
5, 6, 7, so as to exhibit their effect on the appearance of the army
and on the minds of the men, and they are considered together from
two points of view, the κατήφεια
which they involved and besides (καὶ
μὴν, § 6) the ἰσομοιρία
which they involved. Thus the whole chap. from § 2 forms a chiasmus,
as regards the matter, and it is a perfect example of composition.
Macaulay said of ‘the Retreat’ that there was no prose composition
in the world that he placed so high.
ὑποφευγούσῃ
—the comparison
has lost its force for us; but the phenomenon referred to was not a
rare one in
those times.
ὑπὸ τοῖς ὅπλοις
—ἐπὶ
in
addition to, in place of ὑπό
, has been generally accepted, but Widmann rightly
says that the change is unnecessary. It is not easy to say how else
hoplites could have carried food but in the left hand, and so of
necessity beneath the shield.
ἀκολούθων
—i.e.
θεραπόντων.
παραχρῆμα
—sc.
ἀπηυτομόλουν.
καὶ μὴν
—introducing a new point in the
description. Thuc uses καὶ μὴν
only in speeches and the more highly wrought parts of the narrative.
ἥ τ’ἄλλη αἰκία κ τ.λ.
—lit. the
degradation generally and especially the universality of the
suffering,
though it had some alleviation in the fact that it was shared by
many, was
nevertheless at that moment thought intolerable.
ἡ
ἰσομοιρία is the special part of the αἰκία singled out for comment: in this
case the universality of the suffering is designated αἰκία because hoplites and knights were
suffering the same hardship as the meanest slave. (Junghahn has
rightly explained this passage; but the addition of τ’ is necessary in order to get the
sense required.)
τὸ μετὰ πολλῶν
—Cic. ad At.
XI. 6.1
meus
dolor non modo non minuitur, cum socium sibi adjungit dolorem
tuum, sed etiam augetur. ‘General evils,’ Machiavelli says,
‘are endured more easily than private ones.’
ἀπὸ οἵας
—an exclamation, the donble οἷος being used as so often in tragedy
to express a marked contrast Trans. ‘especially considering that
they’ etc.
ἀφίκατο
—the plur. suits αὔχημα much better than the sing.
ἀφῖκτο, even if it could be used impersonally.
τὸ
διάφορον
—reverse.
οἷς
=ὅτι
αὐτοῖς.
ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ . .
ἥκειν
—Herod. has this idiom twice
without the
article.
δουλωσομένους
—for the change from dat.
to accus. cf. c. 40.4; 57.9.
τοῦτο
—object of
πάθωσι.
ναυβατῶν
—found in Herod.,
Thuc., and tragedy only.
ὁπλιτικῷ προσέχοντας μᾶλλον
ἢ
ναυτικῷ
—trusting, not
to a fleet, but to
hoplites. This was a bad omen for the queen of the sea.
Ἔτι καὶ ἐκ κ.τ.λ.
—even
as things are, you must hope on (men have been saved from
terrors even greater than
these), and you must not reproach yourselves either for your
disasters or for your
present undeserved sufferings. The speech is based upon
the same topics that have been handled in c. 75,
§§ 5, 6, 7, viz., the κατήφεια, κατάμεμψις,
and
ἰσομοιρία.
ξυμφοραῖς
—of the battles
that had been lost.
l. 7,
κἀγώ τοι κ.τ.λ.
—You
know
that I too, who am as weak as the weakest of you (yes, you see
how I am
suffering),
whose success both in private and in public life is, I think,
considered equal to
any man's, am now in the same danger and suspense as the
humblest of you. Yet have I
rendered with exactness my duty to the gods, and just and
inoffensive dealing to
men. In this rendering the antithesis, to our taste
excessive, is modified. Notice the close correspondence of οὔτε ῥώμῃ, etc. and οὔτ’ εὐτυχίᾳ, etc.
προφέρων
—see on c. 64.2.
εὐτυχίᾳ
—Intr. p. xxxvii. A great deal is
to be learned about this word and its relation to εὐδαιμονία in the tragedians, esp. in
Euripides. Cf. Arist. Eth.
I.
9
πολλαὶ μεταβολαὶ γίνονται καὶ
παντοῖαι τύχαι κατὰ τὸν
βίον, καὶ ἐνδέχεται τὸν μάλιστ’ εὐθηνοῦντα μεγάλαις συμφοραῖς
περιπεσεῖν
ἐπὶ γήρως. Nicias here propounds his doctrine that the
gods repay the good and the bad with good and ill fortune in this
life. His belief was the same as that of Herodotus.
ἀνθ’ ὧν κ.τ.λ.
—therefore
I am yet strong in hope for the future, and our misfortunes lose
some of their
terror. Perhaps they may even cease. For the enemy have had
enough success, and if
any of the gods was offended at our enterprise, we have now
received sufficient
punishment.
οὐ κατ’ ἀξίαν δὴ φοβοῦσι
—i.e. (
φοβοῦσιν) ἐλασσόνως ἢ
κατ’ ἀξίαν Antiphon tetr.
Γ.
δ 6, lit.: ‘not in accordance with their assumed
importance.’ (There are several ways of taking these words. Classen
says ‘terrify you more than they ought to do’)
λωφήσειαν
—of the cessation of pain or
trouble, as in II. 49.5. Plat. Phaedrus 251 C λωφᾷ
τῆς ὀδύνης .
ἱκανὰ γὰρ
—contrast with this Eur. Supp. 226
κοινὰς
γὰρ ὁ θεὸς
τὰς τύχας ἡγούμενος | τοῖς τοῦ
νοσοῦντος πήμασιν
διώλεσε | τὸν οὐ νοσοῦντα
κοὐδὲν
ἠδικηκότα.
ἦλθον γάρ που
κ.τ.λ.
—others besides us
have attacked their neighbours before now, and after doing what men
will do have endured what men can bear. So now it is reasonable for
us to hope that the gods will relent towards us (for
we deserve their pity now rather than their envy), and do you,
seeing what fine troops you are and how great the numbers that march
in your ranks, be not excessively alarmed, etc. 23
ἀνθρώπεια κ.τ.λ.
—cf. Eur. Heraclid. 424
ἀλλ’, ἢν
δίκαια δρῶ δίκαια πείσομαι. Cic.
Tusc. 1, 72 humana vitia=ἀνθρώπινα κακα.
τά τε ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου
—the whole of this passage is
very characteristic of Nicias. Cf. Herod. III, 40 ἐμοὶ δὲ αἱ σαὶ μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι οὐκ ἀρέσκουσι, τὸ
θεῖον
ἐπισταμένῳ ὡς ἔστι φθονερόν.
ἠπιώτερα
—in the old sense, expressing a
father's pity for his children, and hence transferred to the gods.
Cf. the meanings of ἐπισκοπεῖν.
καὶ ὁρῶντες
—the transition from τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου is purposely made
abrupt, so as to exhibit the close eonnexion between the gods and
men.
καταπέπληχθε
—strictly this should have
been καταπεπλῆχθαι after τά τε ἐλπίζειν.
δέξαιτο
—resist.
τὴν δὲ πορείαν κ.τ.λ.
—do
you yourselves look to your safety and discipline on the road;
let every man think
that the ground on which he is forced to fight will be his
country and fortress if
he wins it.
σπουδὴ δὲ
—we shall
hurry.
εἰρημένον
—accus. abs.
ἀναγκαῖόν τε ὂν
—arguments drawn from τὸ ἀναγκαῖον are common in Greek
rhetoric. 49
οἵ τε ἄλλοι
—still depends on γνῶτε.
ἄνδρες γὰρ πόλις
—a similar γνώμη occurs in many authors. Soph.
OT 56
ὡς οὐδἐν ἐστιν οὔτε πύργος
οὔτε ναῦς | ἐρῆμος ἀνδρῶν μὴ
ξυνοικούντων
ἔσω.
τῶν τε ἐ. . . . ἀπορίᾳ . . . καὶ . .
.
ἦσαν
—these are the two reasons given
for κακῶς εἷχε, the principal
clause replacing a subordinate.
τοὐναντίον
—i.e. no longer westwards,
with no further attempt to reach the high ground.
ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς
—Holm says that this refers to the
whole of the march ever since they left Lysimeleia. Freeman however
refers it to what immediately precedes about πρὸς
τὴν
θάλασσαν. He thinks that it was the road leading
eventually to Catana that the Syr. had specially blocked. But
neither view is satisfactory. It is clear that ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὕτη (1) is contrasted
with τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδὸν ᾗ διενοήθησαν,
(2) implies nothing of necessity as to their previous purpose, being
a geographical note about ἡ πρὸς τὴν
θάλασσαν ὁδός. Thuc. does not say that the A. no
longer hoped to reach Catana, but that this road did not lead
ultimately in that direction. The intention of the A. was throughout
the same— ἀποχωρεῖν
ᾗ ἂν τάχιστα μέλλωσί τινος
χωρίου . . . φιλίου ἀντιλήψεσθαι c. 60.2, whether circumstances offered
Catana or any other place. (It is futile to discuss whether they
intended ultimately to reach Catana or not. Probably the question
was never discussed by them.)
φόβοι καὶ δείματα
ἐγ
—epexegesis of οἷον. Note
δεῖμα
panic,
δέος
apprehension,
φόβος
fear. [
ἀπὸ
]—a dittography of the syllable that
follows If this were genuine, we should have
ἀπιοῦσιν. Moreover ‘si quis ἀπό
τινος
ἔρχεται, quodam modo eum eo conjunctns fuisse et nunc
ab eo segregari cogitatur.’ Sobolewski.
ἰοῦσιν
—with
αὐτοῖς.
ἀφικνοῦνται
—sc. τὸ
Νικίου στράτευμα. ὅμως means notwithstanding the trouble
caused by the disorder of Demosthenes' division.
πρὸς τὴν θ
—near to
the
coast
τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν Ἐλωρινὴν
—the
ancient road from Syr. to its dependency Helorus, which had been
seized from the
Sicels in order to prevent them from reaching the S.E. corner of
Sicily. N. reached
the road at some point north of the Cacyparis. 27
ὅπως
—presumably this
arrangement had been made with Demosthenes.
Κακυπάρει
—the Cassibile.
ἄνω
—inland. They still
hoped to reach the hill country of the Sicels.
ἤλπιζον
—Holm says that this seutence
refers to c. 77.6
προπέπεμπται
ὡς αὐτούς etc., and that this proves that the A. had
not intended to get to Catana, since they had ordered the Sicels to
meet them on the Cacyparis But if they had pursued their original
route over the Acraean rock, they might have eome out somewhere near
the source of the Cacyparis, but quite fourteen miles from where
they now crossed the river. If they meant to follow thc river up to
some point which they had been trying to reach from
the first, still nothing is proved with regard to their ultimate
intentions. Freeman thinks that Nicias had sent fresh messages to
the Sicels when he changed his route. But it is quite likely that he
assumed that the Sicels would march down the stream when they failed
to find him higher up.
Ἐρινεόν
—it is not certain
what stream is meant; but it is generally thought to be the
Cavallata.
ἐκέλευον
—sc.
χωρεῖν—this was done in the hope that they might find some
way into the interior that was unoccupied by the enemy.
ἡ ήμέρα
—i.e. the day
referred to above.
ἐν αἰτίᾳ . . . εἶχον
=ᾐτιῶντο
.
ὑστέροις οὖσι
—it is not
known whether Demosth. crossed the Cacyparis or not.
τότε
—referring to c. 80.4.
δίχα δὴ ὄντας
—sc. ἀπὸ
τῶν μετὰ Νικίου.
θαα—σσόν τε
—this is answered by ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης below, τε
. . . δέ replacing μὲν . . .
δἐ, as often in tragedy. Cf. III.
52
τούς
τε ἀδίκους κολάσειν, παρὰ δίκην δ’
οὐδἐνα. As for τε γὰρ
meaning namque, there is no certainty that it
occurs in good Attic. Several passages cited by Shilleto on Demosth. F. L. 176 are corrupt, and the rest are prob.
instances of anacoluthon. Generally where τε
is not answered by καὶ there is a
parenthesis, which interrupts the construction, as in Plat. Gorg. 524B where τό τε
σῶμα is eventually answered by ταὐτὸν
δή μοι
δοκεῖ . . . καὶ περὶ τὴν ψυχήν.
ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ
—this phrase is
used of circumstances of any kind.
ἑκόντας εἶναι
—
εἶναι is infin. of limitation, and in this phrase is
almost confined to neg. sentences.
ὅσ’ ἂν ἀναγκάζωνται
—as C has ὅσα ἀναγκάζωνται, Dobree's correction,
by which the sense is much improved, should be accepted.
τὰ πλείω
—
plerumque.
ἐνδιατρίβων
—VIZ. ἐν
τῷ ξυντάσσεσθαι. Note the word, which is useful.
ἀνειληθέντες
—synonym of συστραφέντες.
ἔς τι χωρίον
—Plutarch says
this was the estate that had belonged to Polyzelus, probably the
brother of Gelon,
Hiero, and Thrasybulus, the tyrants.
ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν
—on
both sides. (Leake, Grote, and Freeman wrongly translate
as though it were ἄντικρυς.)
περισταδόν
—found, except
here, only in Herod. and poets.
ξυσταδὸν μάχαις
—adverb qualifying verbal
noun, as cc. 34, 6, l. 34; 71, 3.
Φειδώ τις ἐγίγνετο
—with τῳ=πᾶς τις
ἐφείδετο
ἐπ’
—ut in. The μὴ is inserted because hindrance is
implied.
ἦγε
—still along the Helorine
road, hoping to find an unguarded way to the right.
Ἀσσίναρον
—the name only
occurs in the accounts of the retreat. It is identified as the
Falconara.
ἅμα μὲν
βιαζόμενοι
—because, being
harassed by the
cavalry and the
light-armed, they thought that they would be somewhat better off
if they crossed
the
river, and also owing to their suffering and thirst. One
cause of ἠπείγοντο is οἰόμενοι, the other is ὑπὸ τῆς ταλαιπωρίας. The rest, βιαζόμενοι . . . ὄχλου, is subordinate
to οἰόμενοι. So Bauer, Kruger,
Classen, Fr. Muller. Poppo made βιαζόμενοι
depend on
ἠπείγοντο, and οἰόμενοι
as well; but in all other cases in which two participles
stand thus in the same relation to the verb, Thuc. either joins them
by καὶ or places the verb between
them. Stahl places οἰόμενοι . . .
ποταμόν after ταλαιπωρίας,
and this greatly improves the sense, since it is hard to see the
bearing of βιαζόμενοι on οἰόμενοι. Why should the attacks
diminish after they had crossed the river? Perhaps the A. thought
they would then turn off to the right and shake off the enemy to
some extent. (In any case the sentence is not a good one.)
περί τε . . . διεφθείροντο
—cf. πίπτειν, πταίειν and σφάλλεσθαι περὶ with dat.; but the
construction is poetical and Ionic.
σκεύεσιν
—
accoutrements.
ἐμπαλασσόμενοι
=
ἐμπλεκόμενοι. The word occurs nowhere else in Attic.
ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα
—regarded as
one word.
ἦν
—the subject to be
supplied from the context.
κοίλῳ
—with a deep bed; a meaning that
occurs several times in Plutarch, e.g.
Lucul.
24.
ἐπικαταβάντες
—both banks of
the Assinarus are steep, and the water, as usual in Sicily, does not
fill the whole
of its bed, which is wide. The Pel. went down the bank into the bed
and cut down the
A., while the Syr. stood on the opposite bank to prevent the A. from
getting across.
εὐθὺς διέφθαρτο
—the plup. is
occasionally thus used with εὐθὺς
to express a result hastily arrived at, esp. in combination with the
imperf., e.g. Dem. 19.154
τότ’ εὐθὺς ἐγνώκειν καὶ
προεωρώμην.
ὁμοῦ τῷ πηλῷ
—with
ἐπίνετο.
τοῦ μὲν . . . τοῦ
δὲ
—apposition to
διεφθαρμένου.
πιστεύσας μᾶλλον
—
N. had always been, as far as his duty allowed him, a
friend of Sparta.
Freeman
.
χρήσασθαι . . . ὅ τι
βούλονται
—regular formula
for an unconditional
surrender.
φονεύοντας
—an Ionic word, found often in
tragedy and Herod., and four times in Thuc. See Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 15.
ἀπεκρύψαντο
—sc. οἱ
Συρακόσιοι, hid for their own purposes, to
keep or to sell.
τοὺς διωξομένους
—the fut.
partic. with art.—not a very common construction—refers to no
definite person.
τὸ . . . ἁθροισθὲν
—for the neut. cf. c. 43.7.
ἐς τὸ κοινὸν
—just as τὸ κοινὸν is used of the state
treasury, since the prisoners became state property.
ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως
—cf. c. 82.2
ὁμολογία
γίγνεται. In the case of Demosth. there were definite
terms and his men surrendered to the state.
ἐντῷ . . . πολέμῳ
τούτῳ
—there have been from
early times two ways of understanding this passage: (1) the
scholiast thinks that Thuc. is comparing the disaster at the
Assinarus with those of the Pel. war generally: accordingly he
thinks Σικελικῷ is wrong. So
Kruger, Stahl: (2) Valla understands him to be comparing this
disaster with other battles of the Sicilian war. The scholiast is
probably right, since there is no other instance of great carnage, φόνος or
σφαγή, in the Sicihan war with which the last disaster
could be aptly compared; and as Thuc. was writing the history of the
Sicilian expedition, not as a separate work, but as part of his
general history, it is strange that he should speak of the Sicilian
campaigns only in giving an idea of the extent of the loss. (Arnold
says ‘it is as if an historian of the French campaign in Russia were
to say of their loss at the Beresina, “that it was greater than on
any other occasion throughout this Russian campaign.”’ But, after
the losses of 1812, that statement would convey an idea of awful
slaughter, whereas this does not.)
παραυτίκα
—these were some cavalry, who
under command of Callistratus made their escape to Catana. Pausanias 7.16.4.
ἐς Κατάνην
—among these were Tydeus,
afterwards one of the generals at Aegospotami, and the son of
Polystratus for whom Lysias wrote the speech ὑπὲρ
Πολυστράτου. They continued to fight for Catana against
Syr. Lys.
20.24.
τὰ σκῦλα
—Plut.
Nic. 27 says that the finest trees on the banks of the
Assinarus were decked with A. panoplies.
κατεβίβασαν
—by a decree
passed in the assembly at Syr. after a debate of which Diodorus and
Plutarch give
details. The quarries are among the most striking features of
Syracusan topography,
most of them running in a long row along the S.E. side of Achradina.
They are now
disused and exceedingly picturesque. The date of the sentence is
about the middle of
September.
ἄκοντος Γυλίππου
—Hermocrates
also, as Diod. and Plut. relate, spoke against the motion which was
proposed by a
leader of the democrats.
ἀπέσφαξαν
—we know from Plutarch that
Philistus agreed with Thuc. that Demosth. and N. were put to death,
and this confirmation by the contemporary Sicilian historian is too
strong to be set aside by the story of Timaeus that they were
allowed to commit suicide. (The manner of their death is unknown; in Plut. Nic. 28
Δημοσθένην
δὲ καὶ N. ἀποθανεῖν
Τίμαιος οὔ φησιν ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων καταλευσθέντας?
(or κελευσθέντας), ὡς
Φίλιστος ἔγραψε καὶ Θουκυδίδης, I believe that we
should read καταδεθἐντας unless
καταλευσθέντας could mean cast
into the stone
quarries, as Hesych. explams the word.)
τοῖς ἄλλοις
—sc.
ἀγωνίσμασι.
νήσῳ
—Sphacteria, in 425 B.C.
ὥστε ἀφεθῆναι
—depends on προυθυμήθη: cf. c. 62.4; 77.5
.
διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν κ.τ.λ.
—describe the
ethical excellence of N.; for
ἐπιτήδευσιν shows that Thuc. is not thinking of the
military sense of ἀρετή. On the
whole he uses ἀρετὴ as Plato does,
i.e. as embracing the fonr cardinal virtues, ἀνδρεία,
σωφροσύνη, δικαιοσύνη, φρόνησις, and, though later writers
had an idea that N. was a coward, there is nothing to show that he
was more than a moral coward. Thuc. himself
admits moral cowardice on the part of N. when he attributes
superstition to him. The construction is disputed, but it is natural
to suppose that both πᾶσαν and νενομισμένην belong to
ἐπιτήδευσιν, not to ἀρετήν.
Trans. ‘because he had directed his course of life wholly in
accordance with virtuous principles,’ i.e. in accordance with
elementary ethical principles, not in accordance with any school of
philosophy. νομίζω=I put into
practice; ἐπιτήδευσις=a theory of
life, on which concrete ἐπιτηδεύματα
are based. Thuc. attributes οὐ
δημοτικὴ παρανομία to Alcibiades. We recall too the
sneer of Plato in Phaedo 82 A
οἱ τὴν δημοτικήν τε
καὶ πολιτικὴν ἀρετὴν
ἐπιτετηδευκότες, ἣν δὴ καλοῦσι σωφροσύνην τε καὶ δικαιοσύνην, ἐξ
ἔθους
τε καὶ μελέτης γεγονυῖαν ἄνευ φιλοσοφίας τε καὶ νοῦ.
μετεχείρισαν
—Thuc. like
Herod., uses the act. of this word, whereas other authors use the
middle.
οἵ ἥλιοι
—the plur. is
intensive, as in θέρμαι,
καύματα.
ἐς ἀσθένειαν ἐνεωτέριζον
—like βάλλειν or τρέπειν
εἰς, of some enforced change of state; ‘through the change
of temperature induced disease.’
τῶν νεκρῶν . . . οἳ . . .
ἀπέθνῃσκον
—it appears that νεκροὶ
ἀποθνῄσκουσι is possible Greek, as in Plut.
Pyrrhus 21
τραυμάτων πολλῶν
γενομένων καὶ νεκρῶν
πεσόντων, and perhaps Thuc. II.
52
νεκροὶ ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοις
ἀποθνῄσκοντες
ἔκειντο.
ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ μῆνας
—sc. daily. This allowance is
what was called in c. 82
ἡ ἀναγκαιοτάτη δίαιτα, and is half that
which was given to a slave. Diodorus, following the Sicilian
account, says that each man received two
χοίνικες of meal, i.e. four times as much as two κοτύλαι.
ἄλλα ὅσα
—for ὅσα
ἄλλα, found also in II.
96.3.
ἐν τῷ τ. . .
ἐμπεπτωκότας
—
ἐν is occasionally used with verbs of motion.
ἐπεγένετο
—
accidit.
πλὴν Ἀ. κ.τ.λ.
—comparing l.
15 we see that these were kept in the quarries some six months
longer.
ἔργον
—used in its vague, euphemistic
sense, as in τὸ περὶ τὸν Ἴτυν
ἔργον. [
Ἑλληνικὸν
]—to be omitted,
since there is no contrast between the doings of Greeks and of other
men.
δοκεῖν
—infin. of limitation; c. 49.3.
ὧν ἀκοῇ
—cf. Herod.
VII. 170
φόνος Ἑλληνικὸς
μέγιστος οὗτος δὴ ἐγἐνετο πάντων ὧν
ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν, of the destruction of the Tarentines and
Rhegines by the Iapyges.
κατὰ πάντα . . .
πάντως
—paronomasia, to emphasise
the statement.
πανωλεθρίᾳ
—cf. πανώλεθρος
ἀπόλλυσθαι in tragedy.
ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν
—a common
collocation.
ἀπενόστησαν
—the well-known story in Plut. Nic. 29 that some gained liberty
or shelter by reciting Euripides is by no means improbable; for,
apart from the great popularity of Euripides, the Athenian slaves,
weakened by suffering and unused to mauual labour, must have been a
burden to their owners. With the Athenian retreat we might compare
the retreat of Antony from Parthia in 36 B.C. Cf. Browning Balaustion's
Adventure, and Byron Childe Harold
4.16:
When Athens' armies fell at Syracuse,
And fetter'd thousands bore the yoke of war,
Redemption rose up in the Attic Muse,
Her voice their only ransom from afar:
See! as they chant the tragic hymn, the car
Of the o'ermaster'd victor stops, the reins
Fall from his hands, his idle scimitar
Starts from its belt—he rends his captive's chains,
And bids him thank the bard for freedom and his strains.